JP7246738B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Conventionally, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state that is advantageous to the player can be generated, and a plurality of identification symbols are displayed corresponding to the game. There is known a gaming machine capable of displaying on a display device a decoration game that displays the result in a static manner after the display is changed (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2019-165762 A

However, merely displaying the decoration game cannot sufficiently enhance the interest of the game.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to increase the interest in games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Production control means for controlling game production;
A display means for displaying a game-related display under the control of the effect control means,
The production control means is
The display means can display a decoration game in which identification patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the game,
During the period during the decoration game, it is possible to execute an effect of making periodic movements using the identification pattern in a first period before the predetermined effect and in a second period after the predetermined effect. and
The display size of the identification pattern differs between the first period and the second period, and the cycle of the movement differs between the first period and the second period .

According to the present invention, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. (a) A diagram for explaining an example of a clear pattern setting unit, (b) a diagram for explaining an example of a data structure of a RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of a special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of a big-hit design, the distribution rate of a small-hit design, and the distribution rate of a symbol per time-saving design. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit determination process and a small-hit determination process. It is a flow chart explaining the time saving design hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining production mode information check processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during small hit fanfare. 10 is a flowchart for explaining normal probability fluctuation count update processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining transmission timing of a ceiling reaching command; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of progress of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation rate in a 1st modification. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the first modification. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of progress of a game in the first modified example; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation rate in a 2nd modification. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the second modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation rate in a 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state in a 3rd modification. It is a figure for explaining an example of the progress of the game in the third modification. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of a gaming machine in a third modified example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in a third modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing in the 3rd modification. FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining specific area switch monitoring processing in the third modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining small hit residual sphere processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation rate in a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the order of control processing in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation in a 6th modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the processing during special figure fluctuation in the seventh modification. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display in the 7th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of progress of the game in a 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of an external information signal. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a temporary stop design production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pending display effect; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the left end of the front frame 12 is pivotally attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 as viewed from the front side. It is assembled so that it can be opened and closed. A game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

A display plate 350 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14 . The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a light guide plate is used to make an image emerge when light is introduced from the side edge, but it may be configured by a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 does not display a predetermined display, it is transparent so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game board 30 behind. When a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350, the visibility of the game board 30 behind the predetermined display is lowered. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through a predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for the outflow. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a (see FIG. 7) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The performance button 25 also incorporates a drive source for vibrating the performance button 25 . That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of making a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25 . The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projected state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state). can be

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a hitting ball shooting device, and the like. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

To the right of the effect button 25 is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine. a return button (discharge button) 27b to be operated, a balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever to be operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23 27d, a mobile terminal placement section 28 or the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone owned by the player is provided. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. do. In addition, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, a production that intervenes the player's operation in a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 3). It can be performed.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 for forming a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. The board effect device 44 is operable between a position above the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Three general prize winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

On the right side of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a movable member 37b, and this movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).
It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may allow a game ball to win even when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper big winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is provided. The first special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker-type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. Convert to possible state. The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, below the first special variable winning device 38, there is a game ball that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 2 special variable winning device (lower big winning opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable prize winning device 39 has an attacker type open/close door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. Convert to possible state. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided. In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), special figure 1 display for special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and special figure 2 variation Special figure 2 display for display game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) and special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 (C0, C1 ) and a special figure 2 holding indicator 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and a game state that displays the game state of the gaming machine 10. and a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). The game state display unit 56 includes a first game state display unit 56a (C6) for notifying the player of a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player (a method of hitting corresponding to the game state), out of left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A second game state display unit 56b (C7) for notifying that it is in a time saving state (at the time of operation of the variable time shortening function), and notifying that the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state when the game machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display portion 56c (D7) is provided. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure probability is always constant, so the third gaming state display section 56c is not used.
In addition, the collective display device 50 has a normal pattern display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a normal pattern suspension display device 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the starting memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. I have.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation pattern numbers are alternately changed as shown in FIG. LED lamps A0, A2, A4 and A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5 and A7 are turned off) and LED lamps A1, A3, A5 and A7 are lit (LED lamps A0, A2, A7 are turned off). A4 and A6 are extinguished) are alternately switched to indicate that they are fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 ~A7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the result mode (special result mode) other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps A0 to A7 The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern number is alternately changed, for example, as shown in FIG. LED lamps B0, B2, B4 and B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B7 are extinguished) and LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B7 are lit (LED lamps B0, B2, B7 are turned off). B4 and B6 are extinguished) are alternately switched to indicate that the current is fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp B0 is lit and LED lamp B1 to B7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 pending display device 53 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 reservation display device 54 shows the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) out of the number of winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52, for example. As shown in 4(d), it is displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3). The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

The round display unit 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and during the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected by . The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), the LED is turned on.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns the LED off when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display device 57, during the fluctuation display of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. By alternately switching between the lighting state and the lighting state of the LED lamps D4 and D6, the fluctuation is displayed. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, the LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that it is a hit. Any one of them (for example, the LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate the failure.
The general pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of undigested balls (normal pattern starting memory number = number of reservations) among the number of passing balls of the normal pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 57. For example, FIG. As shown in (h), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 has an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, etc. A normal power supply unit. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a special symbol random number for determining the winning of the special symbol variation display game, a special symbol random number for determining the symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and a variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game ( Random number generation for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A does not consider the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or loss), or the game machine of this embodiment because the probability state is constant, but the special as the current game state One variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the figure variation display game, the number of starting memories, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a is connected to an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. be done. Further, the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32 a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 is input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and the detection signal of the game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10, etc., and the detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12, etc. of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values corresponding to the probability setting values may be different for all of the settings 1 to 6, or may be the same for a plurality of the settings 1 to 6. FIG. Also, the same probability value may be set for all of setting 1 to setting 6. FIG.

When selecting the probability setting value, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position, and the game machine is powered on while operating (pressing down) the RAM initialization switch 112 to set the probability setting value. can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device. Although displayed in 153, it becomes a probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122 , 123 , 124 and 126 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. For outputting the operation data of the winning opening solenoid 2) 39b and the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, and outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value is a port.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. ) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. a third driver 138c for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the third driver 138c; A driver 138d and a fifth driver 138e are provided for receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. DC 5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the fifth driver 138e as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V can be driven.
Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the gate The switch 34a uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. It is In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(a), a specific input section, which is one of the input sections of the gaming microcomputer 111, is provided with a clear range of data in the RAM 111C by changing the state of input to the specific input section. is provided with a clear pattern setting unit 114 that can change the . The clear pattern setting section 114 has a detachable resistor R2. When the resistor R2 is removed, the input to the specific input section is on, and when the resistor R2 is attached, the input to the specific input section is disabled. not in the off state.

FIG. 6B shows part of the data structure of the RAM 111C. A setting storage area for storing setting-related information such as a probability setting value is provided in an area starting from 0000h, which is the leading address. In the area following this setting storage area, the number of normal probability fluctuations, such as the number of normal probability fluctuations for managing the number of games until reaching the so-called ceiling, which starts the general electric support by executing the special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times, is stored. A ceiling count area is provided for storing information related to the control of the . An area for storing various game data is provided in an area following the number-of-ceilings area.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated and the power is turned on, the input to the specific input section of the gaming microcomputer 111 is not ON, that is, the state where the resistor R2 of the clear pattern setting section 114 is attached. If so, the RAM is initialized with address 1 as the leading address. As a result, the area other than the setting storage area is cleared.
Also, when the input to the specific input section of the game microcomputer 111 is ON when the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, that is, the resistor R2 of the clear pattern setting section 114 is removed. In this state, the RAM is initialized with address 2 as the leading address. As a result, the area other than the setting storage area and the ceiling count area is cleared.

By making the operation at the time of RAM clearing different depending on the state of the clear pattern setting unit 114 in this way, for example, in the case of a game machine that does not clear the ceiling count area when clearing the RAM during mass production, the design of the game machine can be improved. By attaching the resistor R2 during time and testing, the ceiling number region can be arbitrarily cleared, and design and testing can proceed efficiently. In addition, since it is only necessary not to attach the resistor R2 during mass production, the production can be efficiently performed.

In addition, since the information from the clear pattern setting unit 114 to the specific input unit is directly input to the CPU 111A without going through another device, it is possible to make fraudulent conduct difficult. Further, by making the data structure of the RAM 111C as shown in FIG. 6B, it is only necessary to change the address to be set according to the state of the specific input section, and the control can be simplified.

Note that the clear pattern setting unit 114 is not limited to the configuration described above, and may be of any type as long as it can change the state of input to the specific input unit. For example, it may be possible to change the state of input to a specific input section by switching a switch. In addition, the game control device has a game control board on which electronic components are mounted, which is enclosed in a board box. However, the game control board may be operable even when enclosed in the board box.

Also, the data structure of the RAM 111C is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, other data may be stored in an area closer to the start address than the setting storage area. This area can store data that is not cleared when the RAM is cleared. In addition, when the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated and the input to the specific input section of the game microcomputer 111 is ON, the ceiling count area may be cleared, and the RAM 111C , the ceiling number area may be arranged anywhere.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the game is comprehensively controlled. A game control means (game control device 100) is provided, and the game control means includes an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) for initializing information stored by performing a predetermined operation, and an initialization means and initialization area setting means (clear pattern setting unit 114) that enables selection of an area to be initialized.
Therefore, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the area to be initialized, and the design and testing of the gaming machine can be efficiently advanced.

Also provided is a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win and an open state in which game balls can easily win, and the game control means changes the state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the 1 state and a second state in which winning is easier than in the first state, and the second state can be set based on the number of game executions reaching a predetermined number of times. It is possible, and the initialization area setting means can select whether or not to initialize the area for counting the number of game executions.
Therefore, it becomes possible to arbitrarily select the area to be initialized, and the design and testing of the gaming machine can be efficiently advanced.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having LEDs (light emitting diodes) (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the production control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) from the ball shooting device toward the game area 32 . The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game region 32 and enter the game region 32 is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the first special variable winning apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning apparatus 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), a normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37, and the normal variable winning device A general prize winning port 35, a first special variable prize winning device 38, and a second special variable prize winning device 39 arranged below 37 can be aimed at winning.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50 . In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 57 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. The normal figure display 57 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information. may be configured.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal pattern indicator 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern corresponding to the state of the result of the loss on the normal pattern display device 57 .
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variation time of the general pattern variation display game is the same variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the presence or absence of the general electrical support. In addition, the normal pattern hit probability is 0 when the general electric support is not in progress, and the normal pattern hit probability is 99/100 when the general electric support is in progress.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) Along with storing, a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the special pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. A random value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first start memory and a second start memory. And, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and in the display device 41 of the center case 40 Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) special figure 1 variable display game ( 1st special figure fluctuation display game) execution control, and special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning area) It constitutes execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means changes the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. are configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and it becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. However, these may be displayed in the same display area or may be displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

FIG. 8 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game, that is, a big win, a small win, and a short-time pattern win. The time-saving design hit means that the general electric support is started without going through the special game state. The distribution rate of the jackpot is the same for special figures 1 and 2. The distribution rate of the small hit, the time saving pattern and the loss is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Especially in special figure 2, the deviation result is not derived. It should be noted that the deviation result may be derived even in the special figure 2. In addition, in FIG. 8(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be elected for the small hit and the time saving symbol, but only the special figure 2 may be elected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the big hits include a jackpot with support in which the jackpot pattern with support is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern (result mode of the jackpot), and a jackpot without support in which the jackpot pattern without support is stopped and displayed. There are two types of The jackpot with support will be in the state with power supply support (time reduction state) only for the next game after the end of the special game state, and the jackpot without support will be in the state without power support after the end of the special game state. be. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, there is no probability change due to the derivation of the big hit. In the first special game state (jackpot game state), which is a special game state based on the derivation of the big win, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. Also, after the special game state is over, only the next special figure variation display game is in a state with general electric support.
In FIG. 8(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 8(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8C, for example, as a small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning), the small winning A pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small winning B pattern is stopped and displayed. There are two types of small hits B. In the second special game state (small hit game state), which is a special game state based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.
In FIG. 8(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 8(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different. Also, the small win A and the small win B may differ only in the stop pattern, or may differ in the opening mode of the second special variable winning device 39 . Also, only one type of small win may be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8(d), for example, per time-saving design, per time-saving design A per time-saving design is stop-displayed as a design per time-saving design (result mode of per time-saving design), and per time-saving design A and time-saving design. There are three types of time-saving design hit B in which the winning B design is stop-displayed and time-saving design hit C in which the time-saving design per C-pattern is stop-displayed. In addition, the time-saving design hit is neither a big hit nor a small hit, but can be said to be one type of loss (results other than special results).
In FIG. 8(d), the allocation rate of the type per time saving pattern is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be the same. In addition, the time-saving symbols A to C differ only in the stop symbols, and in all of them, only the next game is in the state with the general electric support, but only one kind of time-saving symbol may be used.

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 8(e). That is, when the number of game executions reaches the ceiling number (here, 900), the specific game state (general electric support) is generated without generating the special game state. The number of game executions is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of the general electric support in the low probability state, and the counting is interrupted in the high probability state. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, it is always counted. Also, the number of game executions is the sum of the number of times the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

The timing for clearing the counting result of the number of game executions is when the chance mode (general electric support) triggered by reaching the ceiling number n is activated, and when the condition device is activated (jackpot game state). The timing for clearing the count result of the number of times the game has been executed can be changed as appropriate. It may include when it becomes a chance mode (general electric support), etc., or it may be one or more of the above timings, or it may be changed to when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. good.

Also, when clearing the RAM without changing the settings, the counted number of game executions may be cleared, and when clearing the RAM with changing the settings, the counted number of game executions may not be cleared. The time when the RAM is cleared without changing the settings is, for example, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is not turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on. In this manner, by not clearing the counted number of game executions when clearing the RAM that accompanies a setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that the setting has been changed.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first special game state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), a second special game state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), and a first specific game state ST4. be.
In each game state, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game by being controlled by the production control device 300, the main start area that is the start area that should be mainly targeted in the game state, and the type of special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed. A certain main variation special figure and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Also, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the variable time of the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game is shortened. There is no short time. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no electric power support and no time saving. Also, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a big win mode. In this first special game state ST2, since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, the shooting direction is right-handed.

The second special game state ST3 is a state in which there is no electric power support and no time saving. Also, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a small hit mode. In this second special game state ST3, since the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the shooting direction is right-handed.

The first specific game state ST4 has time reduction, the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the main start area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the shooting direction to aim at this normal fluctuation winning device 37 is considered right-handed. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation. In addition, the production mode that defines the production mode is a chance mode.
The first specific game state ST4 includes a state ST41 with general electric support and a state ST42 without general electric support.

The transition of the game state is the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the end of the first special game state, the derivation of the second special result (small hit), the end of the second special game state, the derivation of the time saving symbol, the special It is performed by the end of the special figure fluctuation display game in a state where all the start memories are digested.
For example, when the jackpot is achieved in the normal game state ST1, the game moves to the first special game state ST2. When the first special game state ST2 ends, if the shift to the first special game state ST2 is based on the jackpot with support, the state shifts to the first special game state ST4, and the first special game state ST2. If the transition to is based on a big win without support, the normal game state ST1 is entered. After the end of the first special game state ST2, only the next game will be in the state with the general electricity support and the time saving, so that the state will be shifted to the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4.

When shifting to the first specific game state ST4, the general electric support makes it easier for the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory is generated, so the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly used. Game progresses. In this first specific game state ST4, when a big hit is achieved, the game moves to the first special game state ST2. Also, in the first specific game state ST4, when a small hit is achieved, the game moves to the second special game state ST3. In addition, in the first specific game state ST4, when the time saving symbol is hit, it becomes the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4. Further, when a result of deviation is derived, if there is a second start memory, the state shifts to state ST42, and if there is no second start memory, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since there is no deviation result in the special figure 2 variation display game, the case where the deviation result is derived in the first specific game state ST4 is the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed. becomes.

When it becomes a small hit in the first specific game state ST4 and shifts to the second special game state ST3, in the second special game state ST2, there is no electric power support and no time saving. In the present embodiment, when the conditions for general electric support and time reduction are established, only the next one game will be general electric support and time reduction, so the result is a small hit. Even if there is support and time saving, it will shift to a state without general power support and time saving when the special figure fluctuation display game ends, so in the second special game state ST3, it will be in a state without general power support and time saving. .

After the end of the second special game state ST3, if there is a second starting memory, it returns to the first specific game state ST4. That is, when the game moves to the first specific game state ST4, the game state transitions between the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3 until the second starting memory disappears. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the winning balls obtained in the second special game state ST3. This state in which the number of held balls increases continues until a big hit occurs and the state shifts to the first special game state ST2, or until the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 without the second start memory after the second special game state ST3 ends. do.

In this way, although the game machine is equipped with the general electric support and the time saving, the general electric support and the working time saving are always absent in the second special game state ST3. In a conventional gaming machine, when providing a specific period for increasing the player's possession of balls due to the frequent occurrence of small hits in the special figure 2 variable display game, it is necessary to generate the second start memory even in the absence of the general electric support. Therefore, it was necessary to take countermeasures against unintended games that generate the second starting memory outside the specific period. However, by configuring as described above, it is possible to have a state where there is general electricity support only during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in a specific period. Since the electric support is not provided, the generation of the second start memory can be suppressed, and conventional countermeasures against unintended games are unnecessary.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, first, a process of prohibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the first address of the area where the values of registers, etc. are saved. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the first 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X10; Y). X11), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM It is determined whether the value of area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. That is, when the game machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability set value change mode. After that, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is provided by outputting a voice by
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N), that is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the process proceeds to step X41 to recover from the power failure. Carry out the processing for normal recovery.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), initialization processing is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

First, it is determined whether the input to the specific input section is ON (step X71), and if it is not ON (step X71; N), the RAM areas other than the probability setting value are cleared to zero. That is, when the resistance R2 of the clear pattern setting unit 114 is installed, the area including the number of peaks storing the number of normal probability fluctuations managing the number of games up to the ceiling is cleared.
If the input to the specific input section is ON (step X71; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to clear the RAM area other than the probability set value and ceiling count areas to zero. That is, when the resistor R2 of the clear pattern setting unit 114 is removed, the normal probability variation count for managing the number of games up to the ceiling is not cleared.

If the setting key switch 152 is ON (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, a command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a, 19b The fact that the probability setting value is being confirmed is notified by outputting voice by

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) of the timer interrupt processing when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not off (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34). Returning, if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. During the period from the interrupt enabling process (step X32) to the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). . In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set performs power failure recovery processing (step X41) for saving initial values at power failure recovery in areas to be initialized (for example, power failure inspection area, checksum area, and area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command, reaching the ceiling A plurality of commands, such as a normal probability variation number command, which is information on the number of games up to, is transmitted. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Without doing, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. It should be noted that in step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, etc. is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers After saving the initial value (start value) of the pattern random number and the random number (hit random number) for determining the hit of the normal pattern in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X48), the interrupt is permitted (step X49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, and the winning random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generating circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special pattern random number and the hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the periodic CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). In addition, in the special pattern random number and the hit random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the special symbol random numbers and winning random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, the interrupt prohibiting process (step X51) is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54). If the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step X50 can be performed not only in the main process but also in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. It has the advantage of being converted

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61 ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. and an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , and an output process (step X105) for controlling the drive of actuators such as the general electric solenoid 37c). When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106), random number update processing 1 (step X107), and random number update processing 2 (step X108) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, special figure game processing (step X112) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game, general figure game processing (step X114) for performing processing relating to the general figure variation display game, provided in the gaming machine 10, special A segment LED editing process (step X115) is performed to drive the segment LEDs for displaying the display of the figure fluctuation display game and various information about the game so as to display desired contents.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) of checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and determination of whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153, and timer interrupt processing are completed. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is performed. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the prize winning at the stage before the start of the figure fluctuation display game.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls is monitored by the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower A process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 39a is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A7). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A10) is performed.

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win. Processing during special figure display (step A11) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set, and a large winning opening remains. A large winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A8, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game process number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal process is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A16) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A8, if the special game processing number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for setting the ending command and performing small hit remaining ball processing is performed. .
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A19) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20), the symbol variation control process (step A21) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. . Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol variation control process (step A23) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. to end the special game process. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A5; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A20, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first start port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104 ).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and transmit the command to the effect control device 300 Effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A109), perform hardware random number acquisition processing (step A110), and check whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second start port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112). It shifts to the processing of A114 and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, if it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special The starting port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure start switch common processing, first, of the start switch 1 switch 36a and the start switch 2 37a, information on the number of winnings to the start switch to be monitored is sent to the game machine 10. Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to an external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A136), and save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139).

Next, the special symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the special symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).
Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of start opening switches and special figure reservations to be monitored (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148), and perform special figure start opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, and starts the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 16, first, a big-hit determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a special figure symbol random number check table for big hit corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and a step of special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for a small hit is set (step A161), and prepared at step A140 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the time-saving design per determination process ( Step A163) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not the time saving symbol hit (step A164; N), set stop symbol information of losing (step A167), and shift to the processing of step A168.
Also, if the determination result is per time-saving design (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for per time-saving design is set (step A165), and in step A140 of the special figure start opening switch common processing Stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process proceeds to step A168.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A171).
After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A172), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A173), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). (e.g., determination of whether or not)) constitutes prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. That is, when the starting condition is not established although the special figure fluctuation display game can be started, a customer waiting demonstration command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, at step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302). Then, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A305; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306). Then, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 18(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A321), Loss information and big win information are set in a big win flag 1 for discriminating whether or not one special figure variation display game is a big win, and it is discriminated whether or not a first special figure variation display game is a small win. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag for is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the target.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A341), Loss information and big win information are set in a big win flag 2 for discriminating whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big win, and it is discriminated whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small win. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag for is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 19(a) shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the time saving pattern hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step A362), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step A363). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random value matches the small hit determination value A small hit determination process (step A367) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 and saved. Then (step A369), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), the time saving pattern per time saving pattern depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the time saving pattern per decision value Time saving design hit determination processing (step A371) to determine whether or not there is performed.

And, if the judgment result of the time saving pattern per judgment process (step A371) is per time saving pattern (step A372; Y), the time saving pattern per flag 1 area saving the lost information in step A361 is saved. Overwrite and save (step A373), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the time-saving design hit determination process (step A371) is not a time-saving design hit (step A372; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the time saving pattern hit flag 1 area, the loss information is saved.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 19(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the time saving pattern hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepare it (step A382), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0 ( Step A383). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A384) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is a big hit (step A385; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step A381 (step A386 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value A small hit determination process (step A387) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381 and saved. Then (step A389), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), the time saving pattern per time saving pattern depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the time saving pattern per decision value Time saving design hit determination processing (step A391) for determining whether or not there is performed.

Then, if the determination result of the time saving pattern per determination process (step A391) is per time saving pattern (step A392; Y), save the time saving pattern per flag 2 area where the information is lost in step A381. It overwrites and saves (step A393), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the time-saving design hit determination process (step A391) is not a time-saving design hit (step A392; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area and the time saving pattern hit flag 2 area, the loss information is saved.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 20(a) shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value. Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A402), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value, but the lower limit judgment value may be changed according to the probability setting value. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected and set according to the probability setting value from the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407). The upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A409), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 20(b) shows small hit determination processing (steps A367 and A387) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A411). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412). If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set the deviation as the judgment result (step A414) and finish the small hit judgment process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step A414), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the judgment result (step A415), and end the small hit judgment process. do.

[Time-saving design per judgment processing]
FIG. 21 shows time-saving design per determination processing (steps A371 and A391) in the above-described jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this time-saving design per determination process, first, a time-saving design per upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A421). The upper limit judgment value table per time saving pattern is provided for each probability setting value.

The probability of winning the lottery per time saving pattern may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery per time-saving pattern (that is, setting 1 is the most likely to win and setting 6 is the least likely to win). or vice versa. In addition, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may differ in the probability of winning the lottery per time saving pattern.
Further, the range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the range of the time saving symbol hit determination value in the same probability set value are not overlapped. The range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the range of the time saving pattern hit determination value may be overlapped, but they may not be overlapped.

It should be noted that the time-saving design per hit means that the jackpot random number coincides with the time-saving design per judgment value. The judgment value per time-saving design is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower-limit judgment value per time-saving design, which is the lower limit value of the judgment value for time-saving design, and the upper limit value of the judgment value per time-saving design. When it is less than the upper limit judgment value per certain time-saving design, it is determined that it is per time-saving design. By setting the time saving pattern per upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the time saving pattern per judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the time saving pattern per judgment value is set (step A422), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the time saving pattern per lower limit judgment value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value per time saving pattern is the same value regardless of the probability setting value, but the lower limit judgment value per time saving pattern may be changed according to the probability setting value. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value per time saving pattern, a lower limit judgment value per time saving pattern table in which the lower limit judgment value per time saving pattern is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value. Of course, the time saving per symbol upper limit determination value table and the time saving per symbol lower limit determination value table may be put together as a time saving per symbol determination value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value per time saving pattern (step A423; Y), that is, if it is not per time saving pattern, set the deviation as the determination result (step A428), and perform time saving pattern per decision processing. finish. In addition, the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the time saving pattern is lost. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value per time saving pattern (step A423; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit decision value per time saving pattern (step A427). The upper limit judgment value per time saving pattern set here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value per time saving pattern set in step A421 described above.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value per time-saving design (step A427; Y), that is, if it is not per time-saving design, set the deviation as the determination result (step A428), and end the time-saving design per determination process. do. In addition, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value per time saving pattern (step A427; N), that is, if it is a time saving pattern per, the time saving pattern per is set as the determination result (step A429), and the time saving pattern is set. The symbol hit determination process is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (reservation number 1) to load the special symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A434). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is obtained, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A438), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A439). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the performance mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. . Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A440; Y), a special figure A special symbol random number is loaded from the 1 special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A441). Next, a special figure 1 small winning design table is set (step A442), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A443). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is obtained and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop design pattern is saved. A corresponding decoration special figure command is prepared (step A455).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the time saving pattern per flag 1 is a time saving pattern per (step A446), and if it is a time saving pattern (step A446; Y) , Load the special figure random number from the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, a special figure 1 time saving per symbol table is set (step A448), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special figure random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). By this process, the type per time saving pattern is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A451), save the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A452), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A455).
Also, if the time saving pattern per flag 1 is not a time saving pattern per (step A446; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A453), and the stop pattern pattern is stopped. It is saved in the pattern area (step A454), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A455). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A456), and production command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), the special design 1 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop design setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2.
In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 special figure random number storage area (reservation number 1) to load the special symbol random number (step A472). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A473), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A474). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A475), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A476). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A477), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A478), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A479). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the performance mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. . Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A480; Y), a special figure 2 Load the special symbol random number from the special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A481). Next, the special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step A482), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A483). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. A corresponding decoration special figure command is prepared (step A495).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the time saving pattern per flag 2 is a time saving pattern per (step A486), and if it is a time saving pattern (step A486; Y) , Load the special figure random number from the special figure 2 special figure random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A487). Next, the special figure 2 time saving per symbol table is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special figure random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). By this process, the type per time saving pattern is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A491), save the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A492), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A495).
Also, if the time saving pattern per flag 2 is not a time saving pattern per (step A486; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A493), and the stop pattern pattern is stopped. It is saved in the pattern area (step A494), and a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A495). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command territory (step A496), production command setting processing (step A497) is done. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), the special design 2 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop design setting process is terminated.
When setting the stop pattern for each result in this way, by using a common special pattern random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. can reduce the burden of control.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A324, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
First, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A461), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the game state, the number of reservations, the stop symbol pattern number, the remaining support count, and the currently set variation selection table group is acquired. (step A462).
Then, save the acquired variable group selection pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A465), and end the special figure information setting process.

In the variation pattern selection process (steps A171, A326, A346) performed after this special figure information setting process, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table selected based on the variation group selection pointer acquired here.
That is, the variation pattern is selected based on the game state, the number of suspensions, the stop symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variation selection table group. By selecting a variation pattern in consideration of such factors, it is possible to execute various effects.

From the above, a game is controlled in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. game control means (game control device 100) and a normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the game control means has a normal game state and a normal fluctuation rather than the normal game state. It is possible to generate a special game state and a special game state in which winning to the prize winning device 37 is easy, and when the result of the game becomes a predetermined result among the special results, the special game state is generated. A specific game state can be generated, and if the result of the game results in a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the game result can be changed to the special game state. A first lottery random number (jackpot random number) is used to determine which of the result, the specific result, and the losing result, and before the game is executed, the result of the game is divided into the special result and the specific result. , or the deviation result.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

The special results include a first special result (big win) with the operation of the condition device and a second special result (minor win) without the operation of the condition device. One of the first special result, the second special result, the specified result, and the lost result is determined by one first lottery random number.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

Further, the first special result, the second special result, and the specific result each include a plurality of types of results, and the game control means determines that the lottery result by the first lottery random number is the first special result, the second special result, or the specific result. When it is a result, the type of the first special result, the second special result or the specific result will be determined using one second lottery random number (special symbol random number).
Therefore, by using a common second lottery random number even if the results are different, the lottery control can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 25 shows the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure fluctuation processing, first, a design stop command corresponding to the fluctuation design determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the time saving per symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for the processing during special figure display as the processing number (step A605), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Furthermore, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the pattern determination number signal control timer area according to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal Control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611 ). Next, time shortening fluctuation count update processing (step A612) for managing the number of times the game is executed in the general electricity support state (time saving state) is performed, and the processing during special figure fluctuation is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 show the special figure displaying process (step A11) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the time saving pattern per flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the time saving pattern per flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701), clear the RWM time saving pattern per flag 1 area and time saving pattern per flag 2 area (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of RWM. And clear the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A707), and if it is a big hit (step A707; Y), it is related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710), and the round A number upper limit table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708). Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operation device operating signal ON, special symbol 1 winning signal ON) regarding the start of the figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) are set to RWM. Save in the test signal output data area (step A709), and set the round number upper limit table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value (“10”, “7” or “2” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A712 ). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A714), and production command setting processing (step A715) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command relating to the information to set the probability of winning in the normal pattern variation display game to a low probability state (step A716), and perform the production command setting process (step A717). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, at step A720, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called definite jackpot, etc.). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is ON at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

Thereafter, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the big prize opening opening information and the normal pattern variation display game is set (step A721), and the set jackpot fanfare time is set in the special game processing timer area. (step A722). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A723). Information of the time-saving state when the special result occurs is thereby stored. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is cleared (step A724), and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is cleared. The illegality monitoring period outside flag is saved (step A725).
Next, the initial value (here, 900) is saved in the normal probability variation count area (step A761). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability variation count (game execution count) is cleared at the start of the jackpot game state (first special game state). Of the timings for clearing the measurement of the number of game executions, the activation of the condition device (during the jackpot game state) is not limited to the start of the jackpot game state, and can be changed as appropriate during the jackpot game state. For example, it may be the end of the jackpot game state.
Thereafter, a fanfare/interval process shift setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to the fanfare/interval process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100, based on the special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the device 39 to the open state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and if it is a small hit (step A727; Y), A test signal (for example, a special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned ON) relating to the start of the second special figure variation display game small hit (special 2 small hit) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A730). , normal probability fluctuation count update processing (step A762).
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). saves a test signal (for example, turning on a special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the first special figure variation display game small hit (special figure 1 small hit) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A729), and the normal probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A762) is performed.

Then, the performance mode information check processing (step A732) for setting the performance mode is performed, the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A734), and the production command setting processing (step A735) I do. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A736), effect command setting processing (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag saving area (step A738), and the small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting process (step A738) for shifting to the small winning fanfare medium processing A739) is performed to end the special figure display process.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded time saving pattern hit flag 2 is a time saving pattern hit (step A740). When it is per time-saving design (step A740; Y), normal probability fluctuation frequency update processing (step A764) is performed. Furthermore, the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.
In the special figure normal processing transition setting process, save "0" for special figure normal processing as a processing number in the special figure game processing number area, clear the information in the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area, and set the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag Perform processing to save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the area.
Moreover, when the time saving pattern hit flag 2 is not a time saving pattern hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded time saving pattern hit flag 1 is a time saving pattern hit (step A741). If it is per time saving pattern (step A741; Y), the normal probability variation frequency update process (step A764) is performed. Furthermore, the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

Moreover, when the time saving pattern hit flag 1 is not a time saving pattern hit (step A741; N), normal probability fluctuation frequency update processing (step A765) is performed. Then, an effect mode information check process (step A745) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation number for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the remaining rotation number for effect and the remaining rotation number for switching preparation are set. matches (step A747). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
When the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed, and the special figure display Terminate intermediate processing.

On the other hand, if the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A747; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A748), production command setting processing (step A749) is performed, and special A special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for transferring to the normal figure process is performed, and the process during special figure display ends. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction etc. from occurring in

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 28 shows the time reduction variation count update process (step A612) in the above-described special figure variation process. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being supported (step A751). Then, if the general electric power is not being supported (step A751; N), the time shortening fluctuation frequency updating process is terminated. Also, if the general electric support is in progress (step A751; Y), the time shortening variation frequency is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation frequency has become "0" (step A753). .

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction fluctuation number updating process is terminated. Also, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A753; Y), a signal relating to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A756), save the normal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A757), special figure game mode flag area No time saving flag is combined with (step A758). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a second start memory (step A759). If there is the second start memory (step A759; Y), the time reduction variation frequency update process is terminated. Also, if there is no second start memory (step A759; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and during right-handed In order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time reduction fluctuation number update process is completed. .

[Production mode information check process]
FIG. 29 shows the effect mode information check process (steps A732, A745) in the above-described special figure display process. In this presentation mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed.

Also, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , determines whether or not the number of rotations remaining for effect has become "0" (step A773). If the number of rotations remaining for effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, and the production remaining rotation number in the RWM. Save it in the area (step A777), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and save it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A782), Command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information check processing is completed. . As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of rotations before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 30 shows fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display processing. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turn on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turn on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of time saving (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, turn off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening The state signal is OFF, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessary 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794) ). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save normal pattern low probability & time saving no flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery save the probability information command (no time saving) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the time saving state A time-reduction variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). This terminates the general electricity support state and the time saving state. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that can set the special figure probability to a high probability state, the high probability state is ended in this process.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 31 shows the process shift setting process (step A739) during small hit fanfare in the process during special figure display described above. In this small winning fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small winning fanfare mid-process is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A811). A812).
Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small win (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output as a big win + a small win). ) is saved in the external information output data area (step A814).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for the major winning opening (step A816).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the process transition setting process during small win fanfare is completed.

[Normal probability fluctuation count update process]
FIG. 32 shows the normal probability variation count update process (steps A762, A764, A765) in the above-described special figure display process. In this normal probability fluctuation count update process, first, the normal probability fluctuation count is updated by -1 (step A62). As a result, the normal probability variation count (game execution count) is measured (updated) at the end of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game.
In addition, since the special figure probability is always constant in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the normal probability fluctuation frequency is always updated. In some cases, the normal probability fluctuation frequency is not updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of normal probability fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined number (step A76). If the number of normal probability fluctuations is equal to or less than a predetermined number (step A76; Y), a normal probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the number of normal probability fluctuations is prepared (step A63), and effect command setting processing (step A64) is performed. . As a result, a normal probability variation frequency command for notifying the normal probability variation frequency (game execution frequency) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . If the number of normal probability fluctuations is not equal to or less than the predetermined number (step A76; N), the process proceeds to step A65.

When the number of games to reach the ceiling is large, even if the information on the number of normal probability fluctuations is transmitted to the production control device 300, the utility value is not high, so it is inefficient to always transmit the information on the number of normal probability fluctuations. be. In particular, when the number of games to reach the ceiling is more than 127, the amount of data to be transmitted requires 4 bytes, which is inefficient. Therefore, when the normal probability fluctuation frequency is not equal to or less than a predetermined number, information on the normal probability fluctuation frequency is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

That is, the command consists of two bytes, "MODE" for identifying the type of command and "ACTION" for including the content of the command. "MODE" and "ACTION" are distinguished by the most significant bit, and since MODE is 1 and ACTION is 0, the range that can be taken as a numerical value is 128 to 255 for MODE and 0 to 127 for ACTION. Become. When transmitting a value exceeding 127 as ACTION, for example, 80h (=128) indicating the lower number of times as MODE + 7 lower bits of the value of the number of times as ACTION, and 81h (=129) indicating the upper number of times as MODE + number of times as ACTION It will send the command of the upper 7 bits of the value of To be precise, it is a value that is two bits less, so it can only be sent up to 3fffh (=16383), but information larger than this is usually unnecessary as information on the number of probability fluctuations, so two command transmissions will suffice, and the ceiling will be reached. If the number of games up to this point is more than 127, the amount of data is 4 bytes.

Although the predetermined number can be set arbitrarily, if it is set to a value of 127 or less, the amount of data becomes 2 bytes, which is preferable. Alternatively, for example, P=the reciprocal of the probability of a big hit, and the predetermined number=0.4×P. The probability of winning within the number of fluctuations of the reciprocal of the jackpot probability multiplied by 0.4 is about 33%. Further, when the performance control device 300 also counts the value corresponding to the normal probability fluctuation frequency independently of the game control device 100, even if the normal probability fluctuation frequency is not equal to or less than the predetermined number, the predetermined value As a result, the game control device 100 may transmit information on the normal probability fluctuation frequency to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, it becomes possible to take consistency of the value counted by the game control device 100 and the production control device 300 .

At step A65, it is determined whether or not the number of normal probability fluctuations has become "0" (step A65), and if the number of normal probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A65; N), the normal probability fluctuation frequency update process is terminated. do. On the other hand, when the normal probability change count becomes "0" (step A65; Y), the initial value (here, 900) is saved in the normal probability change count area (step A66). As a result, the measurement of the normal probability variation count (game execution count) is cleared at the start of the chance mode (general electric support) triggered by reaching the ceiling count n. Of the timings for clearing the measurement of the number of game executions, the chance mode triggered by reaching the ceiling number n is not limited to the start of the chance mode, and can be changed as appropriate during the chance mode. It may be at the end of the mode.

Next, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A67), and the initial value for the time reduction ceiling (here, 1) is saved in the time reduction variation count area (step A68). If the normal probability variation frequency update process is the process of step A764, that is, if the result of the ceiling reaching game is a time saving symbol, by executing the process of step A67, at the start of variation (when setting the stop symbol ) is cleared (steps A451 and A491), and by executing the process of step A68, the number of times of reduction in time N is set as the number of times of reduction in time (number of times of support). Thus, when the first condition that the number of times the game is executed reaches the ceiling number n and the second condition that the result of the game is winning the time-saving symbol are satisfied at the same time, the first condition is prioritized.

Next, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A69), Special pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal ON, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal ON) is a test signal output data area (step A70).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A71), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure gate mode flag area (step A72), and maintain the probability status flag In order to have time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special game mode flag area (step A73).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A74), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A75).

After that, a ceiling reaching command for notifying that the ceiling has been reached is prepared (step A77), effect command setting processing (step A78) is performed, and the normal probability fluctuation frequency updating processing is terminated. Thereby, a ceiling arrival command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 can be notified of the arrival of the ceiling. Note that the ceiling reaching command constitutes information regarding the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times. In addition, when reaching the ceiling, the state with general electric support is entered without going through the special game state, and the command to reach the ceiling is the state with general electric support (second state) without going through the special game state. It can be said that it constitutes information about what to do.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the start of the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling in this embodiment is the game A (t31 to 33) in which the normal probability fluctuation count reaches 0 at the end of the game and reaches the ceiling. is at the end of In the game B, an effect relating to reaching the ceiling is executed, but the ceiling reaching command is transmitted before the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command for the game B are transmitted. As a result, it is possible to perform settings in consideration of the arrival of the ceiling when setting the stop pattern and the variation pattern for the game B in which the presentation is performed based on the arrival of the ceiling, and it is possible to perform the presentation without any sense of incongruity or contradiction. . If the ceiling reaching command is sent after the stop pattern command and the variation pattern command are sent, the stop pattern and the variation pattern are sent until the ceiling reaching command comes or after confirming that the ceiling reaching command does not come. Settings must be made, resulting in inefficient control.

Although the ceiling reaching command is transmitted at the end of the game A when the ceiling is reached, the stop pattern command and the variation pattern command are transmitted at the start of the game B, which is a game that executes an effect based on reaching the ceiling. You may make it transmit a ceiling reach command before transmission of . In this case, the ceiling reaching command may be preceded or may be after the decorative special figure pending number command that notifies the change in the number of starting memories.

Also, the ceiling reaching command may include information on the probability setting value. Information on the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the power is turned on, but is not transmitted otherwise. By transmitting the information of the probability setting value with the arrival of the ceiling as a trigger, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the effect control device 300, and it is possible to perform accurate processing in the effect suggesting the probability setting value. .

Further, instead of transmitting the ceiling reaching command, the stop symbol command or the variation pattern command may include information indicating that the ceiling has been reached. Also, as the look-ahead information about the special figure start memory, even if it transmits information to the effect that the special figure variation display game (game A here) based on the special figure start memory is executed to reach the ceiling good. In this case, if there is a special figure start memory that becomes a big hit before the special figure start memory, the normal probability fluctuation frequency is reset by the big hit, so the information to the effect that the ceiling is reached is not transmitted. You can do it. Information to the effect that the ceiling has been reached or information to the effect that the ceiling has been reached means that the number of times the game has been executed has reached or reached a predetermined number of times, or information about the fact that the number of game executions has reached or will reach This is information about what to do or what to do in the state (second state).

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, information on the normal probability fluctuation frequency is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as information until the ceiling is reached. Alternatively, the ceiling reaching command may be transmitted only when the ceiling is reached. In particular, the information of the normal probability fluctuation frequency is transmitted to the production control device 300 only when the power is turned on, and then the production control device 300 counts the number of games until reaching the ceiling independently of the game control device 100. In the case of , even if the counted data is lost due to the power failure of the performance control device 300 or other troubles, it is possible to grasp that the ceiling has been reached by transmitting the ceiling reaching command.

Also, in the above example, the ceiling reaching command is transmitted at the end of the game A in which the ceiling is reached, but the timing is not limited to this. For example, it may be a predetermined timing during the variable time in the game A that reaches the ceiling, or it may be a timing of transmitting a stop command. Predetermined timing during the variable time includes the occurrence of reach, the development of SP reach, the temporary stop of the result mode, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a ceiling reaching command may be transmitted at the start of game A in which the ceiling is reached, and an effect based on reaching the ceiling may be executed in game A. In this case, out of the normal probability fluctuation frequency updating process shown in FIG. To be performed prior to processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. As a result, the ceiling reaching command is transmitted before the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command for the game A are transmitted.

Furthermore, the processing of steps A65 to A75 is performed at the end of the special figure variation display game, and the normal probability variation count is maintained at 0 during execution of the game A reaching the ceiling, and a power failure occurs. To make it possible to notify a ceiling from information on the number of times of normal probability fluctuations even in such a case.

While the game A is being executed, an effect based on reaching the ceiling is being executed, but the time saving state has not yet started. When a power failure occurs during the execution of this game A, the display device 41 controlled by the performance control device 300 having no backup function cannot display the performance until the command related to the game is received (until the stop command is received at t42). Therefore, the power failure recovery screen is displayed. For this reason, the player has anxiety that the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling may not be executed.

Therefore, based on the information of the normal probability fluctuation frequency command included in the power failure restoration command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure restoration, when it is possible to confirm that the normal probability fluctuation frequency is 0 Alternatively, a display indicating that the power has reached the ceiling may be added to the power failure restoration screen displayed on the display device 41, and the player may be notified that the time saving state based on the arrival of the ceiling will be executed. . Alternatively, a display indicating that the ceiling has been reached may be added to the effect started upon reception of the stop command. When the power is restored, the game control device 100 transmits information indicating that the game has reached the ceiling to the performance control device 300, and based on this information, the player is notified that the ceiling has been reached. can be

In addition, in FIG. 33(b), the effect based on reaching the ceiling is started at the start of the game A, but the start timing may be a predetermined timing during the fluctuation time in the game A, or the transmission timing of the stop command. It is good as Predetermined timing during the variable time includes the occurrence of reach, the development of SP reach, the temporary stop of the result mode, and the like. When the timing is based on the execution of reach, a variation pattern including the reach state is selected as the variation pattern of game A.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a game that comprehensively controls the game Control means (game control device 100), production control means (production control device 300) for controlling production based on information from the game control means, closed state in which game balls cannot win, and easy winning of game balls and a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an open state. The second state can be set based on the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times. , and variation pattern information relating to the mode of execution of the game are transmitted to the effect control means, and when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, it is suggested or notified that the predetermined number of times has been reached. Before transmitting the pattern information and the variation pattern information about the game, the information (ceiling reaching command) regarding the number of executions of the game reaching the predetermined number is transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, when selecting a game stop pattern or a variation pattern in the effect control device 300, it becomes possible to select it in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the game control means can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and at the start of the game, start memory information about the start memories is transmitted to the effect control means, and the start memory information is transmitted before the information regarding the number of executions of the game reaching the predetermined number.
Therefore, even if the ceiling information is transmitted, the determination of the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display that starts changing earliest at the start of the game can be performed first regardless of the transmission of the ceiling information.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, game control that comprehensively controls the game. Means (game control device 100), production control means (production control device 300) for controlling production based on information from the game control means, a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and a game ball in which winning is easy An open state and a normal variable prize winning device 37 which can be converted into a first state and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. , and the second state can be set based on the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the result of the game is a predetermined special result among the special results. In this case, it is possible to set the game to be started after the end of the special game state to the second state. At the start of the game in which the suggestion or notification is made, the information regarding the transition to the second state without going through the special game state is transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, in the effect control device 300, it becomes possible to select the effect and the like in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, game control that comprehensively controls the game. Means (game control device 100), production control means (production control device 300) for controlling production based on information from the game control means, a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and a game ball in which winning is easy An open state and a normal variable prize winning device 37 which can be converted into a first state and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. , and the second state can be set based on the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the result of the game is a predetermined special result among the special results. In this case, the game started after the end of the special game state can be set to the second state, and at the start of the game, the pattern information regarding the result of the game is transmitted to the effect control means. When the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, at the start of the game that suggests or notifies that the predetermined number of times has been reached, information regarding entering the second state without going through the special game state is provided. It means that it is included in the pattern information and transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, when the game stop pattern is selected in the effect control device 300, it becomes possible to select it in consideration of reaching the ceiling, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, game control that comprehensively controls the game. Means (game control device 100), production control means (production control device 300) for controlling production based on information from the game control means, a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and a game ball in which winning is easy An open state and a normal variable prize winning device 37 which can be converted into a first state and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. , and the second state can be set based on the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the result of the game is a predetermined special result among the special results. In this case, the game started after the end of the special game state can be set to the second state. When the number of executions of the game reaches a predetermined number of times, suggesting or notifying that the predetermined number of times has been reached relates to entering the second state without going through the special game state at the start of the game The information is included in the variation pattern information and transmitted to the effect control means.
Therefore, when selecting a variation pattern in the effect control device 300, it becomes possible to select considering reaching the ceiling, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-described special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A820). If the time reduction determination data area is not cleared (step A820; N), that is, if the process of step A67 was not executed in the previous normal probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A764), the time reduction determination data The corresponding initial value is saved in the time reduction variation count area (step A821), and the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A822). That is, when the time-saving design per pattern stops, only a signal (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) relating to the start of time-saving is output as an external information signal.
Then, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A824), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure gate mode flag area (step A825), and maintain the probability state flag In order to have time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) is obtained (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting (step A904) in the jackpot end processing is performed. By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the performance mode transition information, the variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group, is also acquired.
That is, when the time saving pattern hits, the stop pattern which is the type of the time saving pattern per is selected by the special pattern random number, and the production mode transition information is selected based on the stop design, and the variation pattern scenario is selected. It will happen.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the production mode and managing the variation selection table group in the game control device 100, The effect mode number of the mode is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, after the end of the special figure variation display game that hits the time saving pattern, the number of production remaining rotations in the production mode that is set is acquired, and saved in the production remaining rotations area (step A832), and the time saving pattern is hit. The next mode transition information of the production mode set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on the execution of the special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that has become a time saving pattern. Become.

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), the command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A835), and effect command setting processing (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, a command that includes the information of "there is time saving" and the information of the production mode is set.
Next, prepare an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number (step A837), perform an effect command setting process (step A838), and issue a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number. Preparations are made (step A839), and effect command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the presentation mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A820; Y), that is, if the processing of steps A66 to A78 is executed in the immediately preceding normal probability fluctuation number update processing (step A764), the immediately preceding Since the processes corresponding to steps A821 to A828 have already been executed in the normal probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A764), the process proceeds to step A829 without performing the processes of steps A821 to A828. Thus, when the first condition that the number of times the game is executed reaches the ceiling number and the second condition that the result of the game is the time-saving symbol hit are satisfied at the same time, the first condition is prioritized. In addition, when the first condition is satisfied, the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of support) may be given more than when the second condition is satisfied. In that case, the first condition is By giving priority, the more advantageous one is selected for the player, so that the interest in the game increases.

In this way, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state (state with general electric support) based on the number of game executions reaching a predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times).
Therefore, when the number of executions of the game reaches the predetermined number, the state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes advantageous for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. That is, since the second state occurs when the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number of times, a new transition different from the transition of the conventional game state is possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state (state with general electricity support) when the first condition that the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is established. , the second state can be started when the second condition that the result of the game is a specific result (per time saving pattern) different from the special result is satisfied, and the first condition and the second condition in one game is established, the second state based on the establishment of the first condition is started.

Therefore, in the same special figure fluctuation display game, if the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling and the general electric support based on the time saving pattern are activated in duplicate, the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling Since priority is given to support, control processing can be simplified. That is, by prioritizing the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling, the normal probability fluctuation number update process in step A764 and the normal probability fluctuation number update process in step A765 can be made common. Control burden can be reduced.
If both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one game, the second state may be started based on the satisfaction of the second condition. That is, in the same special figure fluctuation display game, if the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling and the general electric support based on the time saving pattern are activated in duplicate, the general electric support based on the time saving pattern may be given priority. Also, when the second condition is satisfied, the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of support) may be given more than when the first condition is satisfied. In that case, the second condition is By giving priority, the more advantageous one is selected for the player, so that the interest in the game increases.

Further, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one game, it may be selected each time which of the first condition and the second condition is to be given priority. For example, the number of time reduction variations (number of times of support) to be given may be compared each time, and priority may be given to the larger one. Specifically, for example, the number of times of support given when the first condition that the number of executions of the game reaches the ceiling number of times is satisfied is "200 times", and the result of the game is A per time saving pattern. The number of times of support given when the two conditions are satisfied is "100 times", and the number of times of support given when the second condition that the result of the game is B per time-saving symbol is satisfied is "300 times". In the gaming machine, when both the first condition and the second condition of the time-saving pattern winning A are satisfied in one game, the first condition is given priority, and in the one game, the first condition and the time-saving pattern winning B of the second condition are established. If both of the two conditions are satisfied, the second condition may be prioritized. By configuring in this way, the more advantageous one is selected for the player, so that the interest in the game increases.

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 35 shows the jackpot ending process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot end processing, first, the time reduction determination data set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time, after the end of the special game state, the time reduction state (state with normal electric support ), it is determined whether there is time saving data set in the case of (step A901).
When it is not time saving data (step A901; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and when it is time saving data (step A901; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) is acquired (step A905). The performance mode transition information also includes a variation pattern scenario that is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the production mode and management of the variable selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired. is saved in the effect mode number area (step A906). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation speed of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the production mode set after the special game state is shifted to the next mode. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state.

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), the command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A910), and effect command setting processing (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which information on the production mode is included in either "time saving" or "no time saving".
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A912), and an effect command setting process (step A913) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A914), and effect command setting processing (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, a signal related to the end of the big win (for example, turn off the signal for big win 1, turn off the signal for big win 3, turn off the signal for big win 4) is saved in the external information output data area (step A918), and save the signal related to the end of the big win (for example, , condition device operating signal OFF, character continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 win signal OFF, special symbol 2 win signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A921), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A923), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot ending process is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 36(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) relating to the end of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A933), save the normal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A934), special figure game mode flag area saves the no time saving flag (step A935). After that, the time shortening variation count area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, it becomes a state without time saving (state without general electric support). In addition, by setting the initial value (here 1) in the time saving fluctuation frequency area, the time saving state is ended by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (here 1 time).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 36(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal regarding the start of the high probability is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A942).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A943), save the high probability & time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A944), and save the special figure game mode flag area saves the time saving flag (step A945). After that, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, 1) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, it becomes a time saving state (state with general electricity support). In addition, by setting the initial value (here 1) in the time saving fluctuation frequency area, the time saving state is ended by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (here 1 time). In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big win, the right-handed hitting is not set in the big win end setting processes 1 and 2.
That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100, over a predetermined period of time, normal variable winning device 37 to extend the period of the open state specific game state (time saving state) can be generated specific game It constitutes state generation control means.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 37 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or cross key 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the cross key 29, processing for changing the content of performance, etc. is performed. .

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc. (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the sound output from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18 including the display plate 350, etc. is performed. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, board effect setting processing (step C20) for controlling effect is performed, and WDT is cleared. It returns to the processing (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 38 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 39 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C239; Y), symbolic command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include customer waiting demo commands, pending number commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error/fraud commands, model designation commands, normal probability variation count commands, ceiling reach commands, and the like. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, an example of game progress and effects will be described. FIG. 40 shows an example of progress of the game after the occurrence of the big hit.
First, when the first special game state ends, the state becomes the first specific game state ST4 and the special figure variation display game is started (t11). In this example, since the jackpot has occurred in the normal game state ST1 and the first start memory exists without the second start memory, the special figure 1 variation display game is started. there is

The variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game that is executed for the first time after the end of the first special game state ST2 is set to be sufficient for the normal variation winning device 37 to be opened multiple times in the general electricity support. , which is considered to be sufficient time for the second starting memory to occur. For the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed for the first time after the end of this first special game state ST2, the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the general electric support is performed in both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Sufficient time to run multiple times. The length of this fluctuation time is, for example, at least twice as long as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In addition, this fluctuation time is longer than the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game after the second time from the end of the first special game state ST2 in the specific game state. In addition, the fluctuation time (t11 to t12) of the special figure variation display game executed for the first time in the first specific game state ST4 after the end of the first special game state ST2 is the second start generated in the special figure variation display game. It is a longer time than the fluctuation time (such as t13 to t14) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on memory.

When the fluctuation time of this special figure 1 variable display game ends, the general electric support ends (t12), and when the stop time for displaying the result ends, the special figure 1 variable display game ends (t13). After the end of the first special game state, only one game becomes the general electric support, so the general electric support ends in this special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the general electricity support is ended with the end of the fluctuation time, but the general electricity support may be ended with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game.
In this example, since the second starting memory has occurred, the special figure 2 variation display game is started after the special figure 1 variation display game is finished (t13). In this special figure 2 variable display game, the result is a time saving pattern, and after the variable time ends and the result is stopped (t14), with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the general electric support is started, and the special figure 2 variation display game is started by the second start memory (t15).

The result of this special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, and when the special figure 2 variation display game ends, the second special game state ST3 is entered (t17). In addition, since only one game is supported by the time-saving symbol, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the general electric support ends (t16). As a result, in the second special game state ST3, there is no general electric support.

After the end of the second special game state ST3, the special figure 2 variation display game is started based on the second start memory (t18). This special figure 2 variable display game results in a time saving pattern, and after the variable time ends and the result is stopped (t19), with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the special figure 2 variation display game is started by the second start memory (t20). Since it is only one game that becomes the general electric support due to the time saving pattern, when the fluctuation time of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the general electric support ends (t21), but this special figure 2 fluctuation display game Since the result was a time-saving design hit, the general electric support is resumed with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t22).

Then, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, and when the special figure 2 variation display game ends, the second special game state ST3 is entered (t24). In addition, since only one game is supported by the time-saving symbol, the support for the general electric system ends when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends (t23). As a result, in the second special game state ST3, there is no general electric support. Such a state in which small hits frequently occur increases the number of balls possessed by the player.

This first specific game state ST4 ends when the special figure variation display games that result in a loss or a small win continue, and the second starting memory is completely consumed without generating a new second starting memory. Also, the game ends when a big win is derived, but in the case of a big win with support, the first special game state ST4 is newly started after the first special game state ST2 ends.

In the above execution mode, the general electric support by the time saving pattern per is started by the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the time saving pattern per (t15, t20, t22, t26), and the special figure that is the time saving pattern. It ends at the end timing of the variation time of the special figure variation display game next to the variation display game (t16, t21, t23). Here, when the time-saving pattern hit continues (t20 to t23), the general electric support ends at the end timing of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game (t21), and the end timing of the same special figure fluctuation display game The public electric support starts at (t22). In this case, perform the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process (step A612) that can end the general electricity support in the special figure fluctuation process that is executed first, and the general electricity support in the special figure display process that is executed later Support operation setting processing (step A742) capable of starting the operation is performed. As a result, after the general electricity support ends, a new general electricity support is started. For this reason, there is no general electric support for the period of the stop display time, but the execution mode is substantially equivalent to continuous general electric support.

By doing the above, when the end and start of the general electricity support occur in the same special figure fluctuation display game, the general electricity support is ended first, and then the new general electricity support is started. Therefore, it is possible to reliably start the general electricity support without causing a situation in which a new general electricity support is started while the general electricity support is being executed. In particular, if the setting is such that the general electric support cannot be started with a new time saving pattern while the state of the general electric support continues, the end and start of the general electric support are the same special figure fluctuation display game If the end processing of the general electric support is performed after the start processing of the general electric support in the case of occurrence, the general electric support by the time saving pattern cannot be started. However, as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by performing the end processing of the general electric support before the start processing of the general electric support, it is possible to reliably start the general electric support according to the time saving symbol.

Next, the presentation of the game will be described. FIG. 41(a) shows an example of the display mode of the display device 41 in the normal game state ST1. As shown in FIG. 41(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. A second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided in the lower right part of the display area. The second ornament game displayed in the second ornament game display section 82 has left, middle, and right areas in the same manner as the first ornament game displayed in the ornament special figure variation display game display section 81. After displaying the identification information in a variable manner, it stops and displays the results.

In addition, a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display unit 83 displays the information of the starting memory corresponding to the main special figure variation display game corresponding to the game state among the first starting memory and the second starting memory. It should be noted that the information about both starting memories may be displayed all the time. Since the game is in the normal game state here, the information of the first start memory is displayed. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the memory display unit 83 corresponds to the first starting memory one-to-one, and is displayed in order of memory, and here it is shown that there are three first starting memories. showing. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the look-ahead such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the memory display section 83, there is provided a running memory display section 84 for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84, and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed, the variation pattern, etc. is suggested by its display mode.

A starting memory number display section 85 for displaying the number of starting memories is provided in the upper left part of the display area. The starting memory number display section 85 is provided with a first starting memory number display section 85a for displaying the number of the first starting memory and a second starting memory number display section 85b for displaying the number of the second starting memory. ing.
An effect mode display portion 644 for displaying the current effect mode is provided below the starting memory number display portion 85 . Here, "normal stage" is displayed to indicate that the normal mode is the production mode corresponding to the normal game state ST1.
Also, in the upper right part of the display area, there is provided a game number display section 645 for displaying the number of executed games counted for managing the reaching of the ceiling corresponding to the number of normal probability fluctuations. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of games reaching the ceiling is 900 games, and FIG. 41(a) shows that 800 games have been executed. Note that the game number display section 645 may display regardless of the number of executed games, or may display when the number of executed games is a predetermined number or more (for example, 800 games or more).

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the fluctuation time ends, the result mode is displayed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in FIG. 41(c). Then, the decoration special figure starting memory display of the memory display unit 83 decreases corresponding to the decrease of the starting memory number, and the display of the starting memory number display unit 85 is also updated. Also, the display of the number-of-games display section 645 is updated. Then, when the special result is derived as shown in FIG. 41(d), the first special game state is entered as shown in FIG. 41(e).

Hereinafter, a case where the game progresses as shown in FIG. 40 will be described as an example. When the ending of the first special game state is executed as shown in FIG. 41(f) and the first special game state ends, a special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 41(g) (FIG. 40 t11). Here, since there is no second starting memory and only the first starting memory exists, the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed. The derived special result is a big hit with support, and upon completion of the first special game state, the first specific game state is entered and the performance mode is the chance mode. A “chance stage” indicating that the game is in the chance mode is displayed on the presentation mode display section 644 .

In addition, since the special figure 2 variation display game is the main special figure variation display game in the first specific game state, the information of the second starting memory is displayed on the memory display section 83 . Here, since there is no second starting memory and only the first starting memory exists, the memory display section 83 does not display the decorative special figure starting memory display. Further, in the in-execution storage display unit 84, a display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the special figure variation display game being performed, is performed.

As shown in FIG. 41(h), when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends, it becomes a stop display time for displaying the result (t12 in FIG. 40). Here, the deviation result is displayed as the result. In addition, four second starting memories are generated during execution of this special figure 1 variation display game, and the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display is displayed in the memory display section 83. Although the general electric support ends with the end of the variable time, the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the performance mode remains the chance mode, so the display of the performance mode display section 644 does not change.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41(i), the next special figure variation display game is started in a state where there is no electric power support. Since the mode remains unchanged, the display of the presentation mode display section 644 does not change (t13 in FIG. 40).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42(a), the result per time saving pattern is derived (t14 in FIG. 40). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the result mode per time saving pattern in the decoration special figure variation display game is set to "321". With the end of the stop display time of this result, the general electric support is started, and as shown in FIG. 42(b), the next special figure fluctuation display game is started (t15 in FIG. 40). Also in this case, since the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, the display of the effect mode display section 644 does not change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the result of the small hit is derived (t16 in FIG. 40). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the result mode of the small hit in the decoration special figure variation display game is set to "123". Although the general electric support ends with the end of the variable time, the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the performance mode remains the chance mode, so the display of the performance mode display section 644 does not change.

The second special game state based on the small hit is started along with the end of the stop display time of this result (t17 in FIG. 40). During the execution of this second special game state, the state in which the result mode of the small hit is displayed as shown in FIG. 42(c) is maintained. Although the game state is the second special game state, the display of the effect mode display section 644 remains the same as in the chance mode. This prevents the player from being aware of the second special game state. Of course, you may make it perform production|presentation as a small-hit mode corresponding to a small-hit.

When the second special game state ends, the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 42(d) (t18 in FIG. 40). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, there is no general electric support, but the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the production mode remains the chance mode, so the production mode display section 644 does not change. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(e), the result per time-saving pattern is derived (t19 in FIG. 40), and with the end of the stop display time of the result, the general electricity support is started, and shown in FIG. 42(f) As shown, the next special figure variation display game is started (t20 in FIG. 40). Also in this case, since the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, the display of the effect mode display section 644 does not change.

When the variation time of this special figure variation display game ends, the result of the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 42(g). With the end of this variable time, the general electricity support ends (t21 in FIG. 40), but since the result is a time saving pattern hit, the general electricity support starts with the end of the stop display time of the result (t22 in FIG. 40). , the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 42(h) (t22 in FIG. 40). Even in this process, the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the effect mode remains the chance mode, so the display of the effect mode display section 644 does not change.
Then, as shown in FIG. 42(i), the result of the small hit is derived (t23 in FIG. 40). Although the general electric support is ended with the derivation of the result by the end of the variable time, the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 and the production mode remains the chance mode, so the display of the production mode display section 644. does not change.

As described above, in the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3, until it returns to the normal game state ST1 or until it becomes the first special game state ST2, the end or start of the general electric support, the small hit The performance of the chance mode is maintained even if the second special game state is started or ended. That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a effect (chance mode effect) suggesting that the state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the second state (state with general electric support). . Therefore, it is possible to suggest (inform) the player that the state of the normal variable winning device 37 is in a state advantageous to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

And the production|presentation control means (production|production control apparatus 300) can continue the production|presentation (production|production of chance mode) which suggests that it is in a 2nd state, even if a 2nd state complete|finishes. Specifically, when the second state (state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4) ends and shifts to the state ST42 of the first specific game state ST4 (when the production mode remains the chance mode) or , When shifting to the second special game state ST3 (when the display of the effect mode display section 644 is maintained in the same display as in the case of the chance mode), the second state remains even after the second state ends. It is possible to continue the production (the production of the chance mode) suggesting that.
As a result, it is possible to suggest (notify) that the period advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. Moreover, it becomes easy to understand that the first specific game state is a period advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game in the first specific game state.

FIG. 43 shows another example of production. In this example, a support state display section 646 for displaying the state of general electric support is provided. Also in this example, the case where the game progresses as shown in FIG. 40 will be described as an example.
When the first special game state ends, the special figure variation display game is started in the state with general electric support, and as shown in FIG. "Supported!!" is displayed (t11 in FIG. 40). As shown in FIG. 43(b), when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the general electricity support ends, and the display of the support state display section 646 indicates that there is no general electricity support, and the display is "waiting for support". "Medium" is displayed and the characters are displayed (t12 in FIG. 40).

As shown in FIG. 43(c), the next special figure variation display game is executed in a state where there is no general electric support (t13 in FIG. 40), and the support state display section 646 is displayed even during the execution of this special figure variation display game. is a character display and a character display of "waiting for support". Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the result per time saving pattern is derived (t14 in FIG. 40), and as shown in FIG. When the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the general electric support is started (t15 in FIG. 40).
Along with the start of the general electric support, the support state display unit 646 displays characters and characters "support restored!!" As shown in , character display and character display of "supporting!!" are performed to indicate that there is a state of public electric support.

As shown in FIG. 43(g), when the variable display ends, the general electric support ends, so the display of the support state display section 646 becomes the character display and character display of "waiting for support" (t16 in FIG. 40). Here, the result is a small hit and the second special game state is entered, but since there is no general electric support even during this second special game state, the display of the support state display section 646 is a character display of "waiting for support". and the character display is maintained. As shown in FIG. 43(h), after the second special game state ends, the next special figure variation display game is started (t18 in FIG. 40). Since this special figure variation display game is in a state where there is no general electric support, the display of the support state display section 646 maintains the character display and the character display of "waiting for support".

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (i), the result per time saving pattern is derived (t19 in FIG. 40), and as shown in FIG. When the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the general electric support is started (t20 in FIG. 40). With the start of this public electric support, the support state display unit 646 displays the characters and characters of "Revival of support!!" done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(k), when the general electric support ends, the display of the support state display unit 646 changes to the character display of "waiting for support" (t21 in FIG. 40). As shown in FIG. 43(l), in the support state display section 646, as a starting effect, the character display and the character display of "Support Revival!" character display and character display are performed.

In this way, by informing the state of the general electric support by the support state display section 646, the player may have doubts about the fact that the normal variable winning device 37 does not operate in spite of the first specific game state ST4. can be prevented. In addition, every time the general electric support is started by winning the time-saving symbol, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction for having obtained the general electric support, and the interest in the game can be improved.
That is, the effect control means (effect control device 300), as the effect (effect of the chance mode) to suggest that the second state, effect during the second state (for example, "supporting !!" in the support state display unit 646 character display and character display), a second state start effect (for example, a character display and a character display of “Support Revival!!” in the support state display section 646), and a second state standby effect (for example character display of "waiting for support" in the support state display section 646 and effect of character display).
Therefore, in addition to being in the second state (state with general electricity support), the second state starts, and although it is not in the second state, it is an advantageous period for the player (first specific game state ST4 or second Since the special game state ST3) can be suggested (reported), it is possible to prevent the player from having doubts and improve the interest in the game.

Although the start effect (the second state start effect) is started together with the start of the general electric support, it may be performed prior to the start of the general electric support. For example, the start effect (second state start effect) may be performed during the stop display time in which the result mode per time saving symbol is stop-displayed.
Also, the start effect (second state start effect) is not limited to the one described above. For example, as shown in FIG. good.

In addition, in the first specific game state ST4, the result mode of the small hit and the time saving symbol hit in the decoration special figure variation display game may be made common to the result mode of losing, and it may be difficult to distinguish from the result mode. By doing so, it is possible to concentrate on the flowing state of the game ball in the right game area 32 without worrying about the result state of the decoration special figure variation display game, and to improve the interest of the game.
That is, the production control means (production control device 300) that controls the production based on the information from the game control means, and the display device 41 that can display the information about the game, and the production control means corresponds to the game. The decoration game is displayed on the display device 41, and among the result modes of the decoration game, part or all of the result mode of the small win and the result mode of the specific result may be used as a common result mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate between a small hit and a specific result, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this case, it is also possible to carry out a notification effect for notifying whether it is a small hit or a time saving symbol hit. As this notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 44(d), if one character wins, it indicates a time-saving design hit, and if the other character wins, as shown in FIG. 44(e), it indicates a small win. to This notification effect may be performed within the stop display time, may be performed during the variable time, or may be performed over the variable time and the stop display time.
In other words, the effect control means (effect control device 300) informs whether the result of the game is a small hit (second special result of the special results) or a time saving pattern hit (a specific result different from the special result). 44(b) to (e)) can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to clearly inform to which of the second special game state and the second state (the state with general electric support) to shift to, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that it is also possible to execute this notification effect as an effect suggesting the second state (chance mode effect).

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the game is comprehensively controlled. a game control means (game control device 100), and a normal variable winning device 37 capable of converting between a closed state in which game balls cannot win and an open state in which game balls can easily win, and the game control means controls the state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in either the first state (no general electric support) or the second state (with general electric support) in which winning is easier than the first state. When the conditions for the second state are satisfied, the next game is set to the second state.
Therefore, the first state can be set during the small winning game state, the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device can be prevented from being opened at the same time, and the target winning device becomes clear and the interest of the game becomes clear. can be improved.

In addition, the game control means is provided with a starting prize winning port 36 in which a game ball can win a prize, and the game control means stores a predetermined first start memory which is the right to execute the first game among the games based on the winning of the game ball to the starting prize winning port. It is possible to store up to an upper limit number, and it is possible to store up to a predetermined upper limit number of the second start memory that is the right to execute the second game of the games based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, It is configured to consume the starting memory with priority over the first starting memory, and when a big win accompanied by the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big win game state is generated as a special game state, and the game is played. When the result is a predetermined big win among the big wins, the game started after the special game state ends is set to the second state, and in the second game, a small win without operation of the condition device is given as a special result. The derived probability is made to be higher than the derived probability of a jackpot or losing result.
Therefore, small wins occur frequently in the second game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the result of the game is a specific result (per time saving pattern) different from the special result, the next game is set to the second state without generating the special game state, and in the second game, the specific result is The derived probability is made to be higher than the derived probability of a jackpot or losing result.
Therefore, in the second game, the specific results occur frequently, and the period of the second state can be ensured, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which the identification information is variably displayed and the result is stopped and displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state is generated when the result of the game is a special result, the game is supervised. A game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game automatically, and a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win and an open state in which game balls can easily win, The game control means controls the state of the normal variable winning device 37 in either a first state or a second state in which winning is easier than in the first state, and in one game, When a condition for ending the second state and a condition for starting the second state are satisfied, the processing for ending the second state is performed before the processing for starting the second state. Become.
Therefore, a new second state can be started after ending the second state, and the control process can be simplified.

Further, the game control means can start the second state without generating a special game state when the result of the game is a specific result different from the special result, and in the game with the specific result, When the condition for ending the second state is satisfied, the process for ending the second state is performed before the process for starting the second state.
Therefore, a new second state can be started after ending the second state, and the control process can be simplified.

Further, when the conditions for ending the second state are satisfied in the game with the specified result, the game control means ends the second state along with the end of the variable display of the game, and stops the result of the game. The second state is started with the end of the display.
Therefore, a new second state can be started after ending the second state, and the control process can be simplified.

In the above-described embodiment, when the conditions for the second state are established, that is, when the jackpot with support or the time-saving pattern hit is derived, or when the ceiling is reached, only the next game is set to the second state. However, the second state may be set not only for the next game but also for a plurality of games. Also, the number of games in which the second state is established may be varied depending on the type of conditions established in which the second state is established.
In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability that the small hit is derived and the probability that the time saving pattern per is derived is higher than the probability that the big hit or the loss result is derived, but the loss result in this case The probability that is derived may or may not be zero.
In addition, one or both of the probability of deriving a small hit and the probability of deriving a time-saving symbol may be at least higher than the probability of deriving a big hit, or at least deriving a losing result. It may be set to be higher than the probability of winning, or to be higher than the probability of combining the probability of deriving a big win and the probability of deriving a losing result.

In addition, the game control means can set the game execution time, and in the first game state (normal game state ST1) in which the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is mainly executed, the second state (general electric support If the condition for the presence state) is established, the second state is started and the second game state (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is mainly executed. Shift to the second game state (first specific game state ST4). and making the execution time of the initial game, which is the game executed for the first time in the second game state, longer than the execution time of the game executed after the first game in the second game state. becomes.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably generate the second starting memory, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, game control that comprehensively controls the game. A means (game control device 100), a normal variable winning device 37 capable of converting between a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize, and a starting prize winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize. 36, the game control means is capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first game among the games based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36; It is possible to store up to a predetermined upper limit number of the second starting memory which is the execution right of the second game among the games based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the second starting memory is stored from the first starting memory. The state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is divided into a first state (without general electricity support) and a second state (with general electricity support) in which winning is easier than the first state. , and when a big win accompanied by the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big win game state is generated as a special game state, and the result of the game is one of the big wins. When a predetermined big win is achieved, the game started after the end of the special game state is set to the second state, and in the second game, the probability of deriving a small win without operating the condition device as a special result is The variable time of the game executed first after the end of the special game state based on the predetermined big win is higher than the probability of deriving the result of big win or losing, and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened at least a plurality of times. It means that it was set to the necessary time.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably generate the second starting memory at the start of the second state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, game control that comprehensively controls the game. A means (game control device 100), a normal variable winning device 37 capable of converting between a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize, and a starting prize winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize. 36, the game control means is capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first game among the games based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36; It is possible to store up to a predetermined upper limit number of the second starting memory which is the execution right of the second game among the games based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the second starting memory is stored from the first starting memory. The state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is divided into a first state (without general electricity support) and a second state (with general electricity support) in which winning is easier than the first state. and when a big win accompanied by the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big win game state is generated as a special game state, and the result of the game is one of the big wins. When a predetermined big win is achieved, the game started after the end of the special game state is set to the second state, and in the second game, the probability of deriving a small win without operating the condition device as a special result is The variation time of the game that is first executed after the special game state based on the predetermined jackpot is over, and is higher than the probability of deriving the result of the big win or the loss, is the variation time of the game based on the second starting memory that occurred in the game. It will be longer than
Therefore, it is possible to reliably generate the second starting memory at the start of the second state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, game control that comprehensively controls the game. A means (game control device 100), a normal variable winning device 37 capable of converting between a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize, and a starting prize winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize. 36, the game control means is capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first game among the games based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36; It is possible to store up to a predetermined upper limit number of the second starting memory which is the execution right of the second game among the games based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the second starting memory is stored from the first starting memory. The state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is divided into a first state (without general electricity support) and a second state (with general electricity support) in which winning is easier than the first state. and when a big win accompanied by the operation of the condition device is derived as a special result, a big win game state is generated as a special game state, and the result of the game is one of the big wins. When a predetermined big hit is achieved, a specific game state is set for a predetermined period including a period of a second state after the end of the special game state. The probability of deriving a winning result is higher than the probability of deriving a result of a big win or a losing result, and the game executed first in a specific game state after the end of a special game state based on a predetermined big win is set to a second state, The variation time of the game is longer than the variation time of the second and subsequent games in the specific game state.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably generate the second starting memory at the start of the second state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the game control means maintains the second game state when the second start memory exists even when the condition for the first state is established in the second game state (first specific game state ST4). This is what I did.
Therefore, when the second start memory exists, there is a possibility that the second state is entered again. Therefore, by preventing frequent game state transitions and making the game easy to understand, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first specific game state ST4, for the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed for the first time after the end of the first special game state ST2, the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the general electric support is executed multiple times. Although it was set to a sufficient time, the variation time of the special figure variation display game other than this may be set to a time sufficient for the opening of the normal variation winning device 37 in the general electricity support to be executed multiple times. For example, for the special figure variation display game started in a state where the second start memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the opening of the normal variation prize winning device 37 is set to be sufficient time to execute the second start a plurality of times. It is possible to prevent the memory from being lost and the specific game state from ending early. In addition, in the special figure variation display game that is executed for the first time after shifting to the first specific game state ST4 due to winning per time saving symbol or reaching the ceiling, the opening of the normal variation winning device 37 in the general electricity support is performed multiple times. enough time to

Further, in the first specific game state ST4, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game with the general electric support may be set longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game without the general electric support. By doing so, the second starting memory is likely to occur, and it is possible to prevent the specific game state from ending early due to the disappearance of the second starting memory.

Also, if the condition to start the general electricity support is satisfied, only the next special figure fluctuation display game will be in the state with the general electricity support, but if the condition to start the general electricity support is satisfied, multiple It is also possible to set the general electric support to exist throughout the special figure fluctuation display game, and end the general electric support along with the derivation of the small hit result. Further, the general electric support may be ended with the start of the second special game state.

In addition, after the end of the first special game state, it is set to a state with general electric support over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games, and due to the derivation of the time saving pattern, only the next special figure fluctuation display game has general electric support. You may make it overwrite the number of games made into a general electricity support so that it may be set to a state.

Also, for the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability of a small hit and the probability of a time-saving pattern are set to be almost the same, but even if the probability of a time-saving pattern is set higher than the probability of a small hit. good. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the second starting memory from disappearing and the specific game state from ending early. Also, the probability of winning a time-saving symbol may be set lower than the probability of winning a small prize. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific game state from continuing over a long period of time. In addition, it is possible to include the deviation result for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific game state from continuing over a long period of time. That is, the length of the duration of the specific game state can be designed by changing the ratio of the time-saving symbol hit, the small hit and the loss for the special figure 2 variable display game.

Also, in the first specific game state ST4, based on the look-ahead information about the starting memory, it may be possible to suggest or inform that the specific game state will end. The specific game state ends when all the second starting memories are consumed without increasing mainly due to continuous small wins. Therefore, the fact that the small hits occur continuously is suggested or notified by the decoration special figure start memory display displayed corresponding to the start memory, or by other display, and the end of the specific game state is suggested or notified. It is possible to

Also, the specific game state ends when a big hit occurs. Therefore, the suggestion that the small wins will occur continuously and the suggestion that the big win will occur may be performed in the same manner. As a result, it is possible to give the players a sense of anticipation that the end of the specific game state may lead to a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

That is, it has a preliminary determination means (game control device 100) that determines a random number before the game corresponding to the starting memory is executed, and the effect control means can execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. , and the specific effect can be executed when the result of the look-ahead for all the second start memories currently stored is a loss or a small hit.
Also, when the result of the look-ahead for the second starting memory is a big hit, the specific effect can be executed.

In addition, in the first specific game state ST4, if the special figure variation display game executed in the state where there is no general electric support and no second start memory is a small hit, the special figure variation display game ends. The special figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the specific game state may be executed in the same manner. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the end of the specific game state may lead to a big win, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

For example, the same ready-to-win effect may be executed in the special figure variation display game that gives a small hit and the special figure variation display game that gives a big hit in the specific game state. In addition, with respect to the special figure variation display game that is a small hit and the special figure variation display game that is a big hit in the specific game state, the special figure variation display game other than the special figure variation display game that is first performed in the specific game state The variable time may be longer than the variable time in the game.

In addition, in the first specific game state ST4, when small wins occur continuously, the number of consecutive small wins is indicated, and the color and display of the background and identification information are displayed according to the number of consecutive small wins. It is also possible to suggest a high possibility that the specific game state will end by changing the mode. In addition, by changing the color or display mode of the background or the identification information according to the second starting memory number, it is possible to suggest the high possibility of ending the specific game state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game, but it is not limited to this. That is, it may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the order of winning, or a gaming machine that can execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game at the same time. It can be.
Also, although the special figure probability is always constant, the low probability state may be shifted to a high probability state higher than the low probability state based on the occurrence of a specific jackpot (variable probability jackpot). The high-probability state period may be until the next big win, or a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability state period is a predetermined number of games after the end of the special game state based on the variable probability big win.

Further, the stop display time in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the condition for ending the general electric support is satisfied may be longer than the stop display time in other special figure fluctuation display games. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the general electric support has ended. Other special figure fluctuation display games include a special figure fluctuation display game in a state without general electric support like the normal game state ST1, and a special figure fluctuation display game executed in a state without general electric support in the first specific game state ST4. A figure fluctuation display game, a special figure fluctuation display game in which the general electricity support continues even in the next game when it is possible to set the state with general electricity support over multiple games. In addition, a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit or a special figure variation display game that becomes a small win may be included.

In particular, it is effective when both the conditions for ending the general electric support and the conditions for starting the general electric support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game, and the conditions for ending and starting the general electric support in one special figure fluctuation display game Only the stop display time when both of the conditions are satisfied may be set longer than the other stop display times.
The stop display time in this case is preferably longer than the execution time of the normal pattern variation display game. Further, it is more preferable to make the time longer than the sum of the execution time of the normal pattern variation display game and the time during which the normal pattern variation display game is won and the normal variation prize winning device 37 is opened.

Further, the stop display time in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the condition for ending the general electric support is satisfied may be shorter than the stop display time in other special figure fluctuation display games. In particular, only the stop display time when both the conditions for ending and starting the general electric support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game is made shorter than the stop display time in other special figure fluctuation display games. Also good. As a result, the period during which there is no general electricity support (stop display time) is shortened, and it is possible to give the impression that the general electricity support is continuous.

In addition, in the state where there is no general electric support in the case of the first specific game state ST4, regarding the shooting direction instruction such as right-handed information instructing right-handed hitting and left-handed information instructing left-handed hitting, right-handed information is continued. Alternatively, neither the notification of hitting to the right nor the notification of hitting to the left may be performed.
In particular, when both the conditions for ending and starting the general electricity support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game, during the period in which there is no general electricity support temporarily (here, the stop display time), Although there is no general electric support, the right-handed notification may be continued, or neither the right-handed notification nor the left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, when the support state display unit 646 is provided as shown in FIG. 43, when the display of the support state display unit 646 is set to indicate that there is a general electric support, a right hitting notification is performed. When the display of the support state display section 646 indicates that there is no general electric support, the notification of hitting to the right may not be performed. In addition, regardless of the display of the support state display section 646, in the case of the first specific game state ST4 or the second special game state ST3, the right hitting notification may be continued.

In addition, the timing at which the general electricity support ends is the timing at which the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the conditions for starting the general electricity support are satisfied is the timing, but if it is after the conditions for the end of the general electricity support are satisfied However, it may be after the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game.
In addition, the timing at which the general electricity support starts is the timing at which the special figure fluctuation display game in which the condition for starting the general electricity support is satisfied is set, but any timing after the condition for starting the general electricity support is satisfied, It may be after the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game.
However, if both the conditions for the end of the normal support and the conditions for the start of the normal support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game started with the normal support, the end timing of the normal support should come first.

In addition, the time reduction fluctuation count update process (step A612) that can end the general electric support is the normal probability fluctuation number update process that can start the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling (steps A762, A764, A765 ) is performed before As a result, after the general electricity support ends, a new general electricity support is started.
However, the time reduction fluctuation count update process (step A612) that can end the general electric support is the normal probability fluctuation number update process that can start the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling (steps A762, A764, A765 ) may be performed later. In this case, either the number of remaining normal electric support games or the number of normal electric support games to be granted upon reaching the ceiling may be set, whichever is greater, or the remaining normal electric support may be set. Regardless of the number of games, the number of games of the general electric support given by reaching the ceiling may be set. You may make it set the number of games which added the number.

[First modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example combines a small winning pattern (result mode of a small winning) and a time saving design winning pattern (result mode of a time saving design).

FIG. 45 shows an example of distribution ratios in this modified example.
In this modification, there are three types of results of the special figure variation display game, ie, a big win and a small win, as shown in FIG. 45A. The distribution rate of the jackpot is the same for special figures 1 and 2. The distribution rate of the small hit and the loss is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Especially in special figure 2, the deviation result is not derived. It should be noted that the deviation result may be derived even in the special figure 2. In addition, in FIG. 45(a), it is possible to win both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 as a small hit, but only the special figure 2 may be allowed to be won.

As shown in FIG. 45(b), there are two types of big hits: big hits with support and big hits without support. In the first special game state (jackpot game state), which is a special game state based on the derivation of the jackpot with support or the jackpot without support, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. In the case of a big hit with support, after the first special game state ends, only the next game will be the general power support. In the case of a big hit without support, it does not become a general electric support after the end of the first special game state.

Further, there are two types of small hits, that is, a small hit A and a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 45(c), for example. In the second special game state (small hit game state), which is a special game state based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. After the second special game state ends, only the next game becomes the general electric support regardless of the small win. In other words, the small hit also serves as a time saving pattern that starts the general electric support. In addition, there may be a small hit that does not serve as a time saving pattern.
Also, as shown in FIG. 45(e), a so-called ceiling function is installed. That is, when the number of game executions reaches the ceiling number (here, 900), the specific game state (general electric support) is generated without generating the special game state.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first special game state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), and a second special game state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit). , there is a first specific game state ST4.

When a big win is achieved in the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. When the first special game state ST2 ends, if the transition to the first special game state ST2 is based on a big hit with support, the state shifts to the first specific game state ST4. Further, when the shift to the first special game state ST2 is based on the big hit without support, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In this first specific game state ST4, when a big hit is achieved, the game moves to the first special game state ST2. Also, in the first specific game state ST4, when a small hit is achieved, the game moves to the second special game state ST3.
When a small win is made in the first specific game state ST4 and the state shifts to the second special game state ST3, the second special game state ST2 is set to a state in which there is neither general electric support nor time saving. If the conditions for general electric support and short working hours are met, only the next one game will be general electric support and short working hours, so the result will be a small hit. Even if it is in the state, it shifts to a state without general electric support and time saving by the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, so in the second special game state ST3, it becomes a state without general electric support and time saving.

After the end of the second special game state ST3, it returns to the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4. In this modification, since the small hit also serves as a time saving symbol hit, the next game after the end of the second special game state ST3 will be in a state of general electric support and time saving. That is, when the game moves to the first specific game state ST4, the state of reciprocating between the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3 continues. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the winning balls obtained in the second special game state ST3. This state in which the number of held balls increases continues until a big hit occurs and the state shifts to the first special game state ST2. In particular, in the case of a big hit without support, the state in which the player moves to the normal game state ST1 and the number of possession balls increases ends.
In this way, although the game machine is equipped with the general electric support and the time saving, the general electric support and the working time saving are always absent in the second special game state ST3.

FIG. 47 shows an example of progress of the game after the occurrence of the big hit. It should be noted that here, it is a case of a jackpot with support, and an example of shifting to the first specific game state ST4 after the end of the first special game state ST2 is shown. The progress of the game is the same even when the second start memory occurs in the normal game state or when the game reaches the ceiling and shifts to the first specific game state ST4.

A special figure variation display game is started by the end of the first special game state (t61). In this example, since the jackpot has occurred in the normal game state ST1 and the first start memory exists without the second start memory, the special figure 1 variation display game is started. there is
The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed for the first time after the end of the first special game state ST2 is set to be enough time for opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the general electric power support multiple times. .

When the variable time of this special figure 1 variable display game ends, the general electric support ends (t62). This is because only one game becomes the electric power support after the end of the first special game state. In this example, since the second starting memory is generated, the special figure 2 variation display game is started after the special figure 1 variation display game is finished (t63). The result of this special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, and when the special figure 2 variation display game ends, the second special game state ST3 is entered (t64).

After the end of the second special game state ST3, the special figure 2 variation display game is started based on the second start memory (t65). In this modification, since the small hit also serves as the time-saving symbol hit, the next game after the end of the second special game state ST3 will be in a state with general electric support. Then, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, and the special figure 2 variation display game ends to enter the second special game state ST3 (t67). In addition, since only one game is supported by a small hit, the support for the general electric power ends when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends (t66). As a result, in the second special game state ST3, there is no general electric support.
After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is similarly started to support the general electric power, and the second special game state ST3 is repeated by becoming a small hit. Such a state in which small hits frequently occur increases the number of balls possessed by the player.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A371 to A373 relating to the determination of the time saving symbol hit in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 19(a). For this reason, the time saving design hit determination process shown in FIG. 21 is not performed in this modification.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A391 to A393 relating to the determination of the time saving symbol hit in the big hit flag 2 setting processing shown in FIG. 19(b).

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A446 to A452 relating to the determination of the time saving design in the special figure 1 stop design setting process shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A486 to A492 relating to the determination of the time saving design in the special figure 2 stop design setting process shown in FIG.

[Small hit end processing]
In this modification, the game control device 100 performs the support operation setting process shown in FIG. 34 in the small hit end process in the special game process shown in FIG. As a result, after the end of the small hit, it becomes a state with general electric support.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state when the result of the game becomes a special result, game control means (game control device) for controlling the game 100), and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the special result includes the first special result (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device and the operation of the condition device. There is a second special result (minor win), and the game control means has a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than the normal game state, and a special game state. , and when the result of the game is a predetermined result of the second special result, the specific game state is generated after the special game state (small winning game state, second special game state) is generated. It can occur.
Therefore, even in the case of the second special result, the specific game state can be generated, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when a big hit is made without support in the first specific game state ST4, the remaining second starting memory shifts to the first specific game state ST4 after the special game state ST2 ends, and the state advantageous to the player continues. There is a possibility that
In order to prevent such an event, the special figure 2 variation display game may be made easier to return to the normal game state ST1 by increasing the probability of being lost rather than the probability of being a small hit.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first modified example, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification can set either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state as the special figure probability.

FIG. 48 shows an example of distribution ratios in this modified example.
As shown in FIG. 48(a), the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is higher than the jackpot probability in the low-probability state. Also, the small hit probability is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 48(b), there are two types of big hits, ie, a high-accuracy non-support big hit and a low-accuracy big hit with a support. The high-accuracy no-support jackpot becomes a high-probability state after the end of the first special game state, and becomes a state without general electric support. It is a so-called ST machine that shifts to a low probability state when executing 8 special figure fluctuation display games in a high probability state. After the first special game state ends, the jackpot with low-probability support becomes a low-probability state, and only the next game becomes a state with general electric support.
As shown in FIG. 48(c), it is only in the low probability state that the small hit doubles as a time saving pattern. ing.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.

When a big win is achieved in the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. When the first special game state ST2 ends, if the transition to the first special game state ST2 is based on a low-probability supporter and jackpot, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST4.
In this first specific game state ST4, when a big hit is achieved, the game moves to the first special game state ST2. Also, in the first specific game state ST4, when a small hit is achieved, the game moves to the second special game state ST3.
When a small win is made in the first specific game state ST4 and the state shifts to the second special game state ST3, the second special game state ST2 is set to a state in which there is neither general electric support nor time saving. If the conditions for general electric support and short working hours are met, only the next one game will be general electric support and short working hours, so the result will be a small hit. Even if it is in the state, it shifts to a state without general electric support and time saving by the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, so in the second special game state ST3, it becomes a state without general electric support and time saving.

After the end of the second special game state ST3, it returns to the state ST41 of the first specific game state ST4. In this modified example, in the case of the low probability state, the small hit also serves as the time saving symbol hit, so the next game after the end of the second special game state ST3 will be in the state of general electric support and time saving. That is, when the game moves to the first specific game state ST4, the state of reciprocating between the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3 continues. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the winning balls obtained in the second special game state ST3. This state in which the number of held balls increases continues until a big hit occurs and the state shifts to the first special game state ST2.

Further, when the transition to the first special game state ST2 is based on the high-accuracy support-less jackpot, the transition to the second specific game state ST5 is made. In this second specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and since there is no electric power support, the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. In this second specific game state ST5, 8 special figure variation display games can be executed, and when the 8th special figure variation display game is lost, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

In addition, when it becomes a small hit in the second specific game state ST5 and shifts to the second special game state ST3, the second special game state ST2 continues to be in the state of no general electric support and time saving. And, after the end of the second special game state ST3, in the case of a high probability state, that is, in the case of winning a small hit in the special figure variation display game up to the seventh time in the second specific game state ST5, the second specific game state Return to ST5. Further, after the end of the second special game state ST3, in the case of a low probability state, that is, in the case of winning a small hit in the eighth special figure variation display game in the second specific game state ST5, it returns to the normal game state ST1. .

As described above, when a small hit is won in a high probability state, it does not serve as a time saving symbol hit, so after the end of the second specific game state ST5, it becomes a state without general power support, and the second specific game state ST5 or normal game It will shift to state ST1. In addition, when the probability is high, the number of normal probability fluctuations is not counted, so the ceiling is not reached. By providing such a second specific game state ST5, the state in which the number of held balls increases by reciprocating between the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3 is terminated by winning a high-accuracy supportless jackpot. becomes possible.

Also in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the special figure probability is provided with a low probability state and a high probability state, and in the case of the high probability state, the lottery for the time saving pattern may not be performed. Furthermore, the high-probability state may be ended by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times, or may be continued until the next big hit.

[Third modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example is a so-called 1 type + 2 type game machine.

In the gaming machine of this modified example, a specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 that is opened in a second special game state based on a small hit, and the specific area A lever member is provided which is operated by a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 53) to vary the probability of game balls entering the slot. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 53) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. , the first special game state is reached. The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the second special variable winning device 39 .

In addition, inside the second special variable winning device 39, there is a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 53) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the second special variable winning device 39 without flowing into the specific area. is provided. The number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 39a provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 (the number of game balls flowing into the second special variable winning device 39), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge By matching the number of game balls detected by the exit switch 38e (the number of game balls discharged from the second special variable prize winning device 39), it is confirmed that all the game balls in the second special variable prize winning device 39 have been discharged. It can be confirmed, and basically, the new second special variable winning device 39 is not opened until this confirmation is completed.

FIG. 50 shows an example of distribution ratios in this modified example.
In this modification, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. The distribution rate of the jackpot is the same for special figures 1 and 2. Also, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of deriving a special result is always constant. The small hit and the time saving pattern are derived only in the special figure 2. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the deviation result is not derived, but the deviation result may be derived.

As shown in FIG. 50(b), the jackpots include a 10R jackpot with 10 rounds executable in the first special game state and a 5R jackpot with 5 rounds executable in the first special game state. There are two types. In the first special game state (jackpot game state), which is a special game state based on the derivation of the big win, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. After the end of the first special game state, only the next game will be the electric power support.

Further, there are two kinds of small hits, that is, a small hit A and a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 50(c), for example. In the second special game state (small hit game state), which is a special game state based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. When the game ball flows into the specific area in the second special game state, it becomes the first special game state. In this first special game state, the number of rounds that can be executed is 9 rounds, and the special game state of 10 rounds is substantially realized by setting the opening of the second special variable winning device 39 for a small win to 1 round.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(d), there are three types of per time-saving symbols A to C per per time-saving design. In both cases, only the next game is in the state with the general electricity support.
Also, as shown in FIG. 50(e), a so-called ceiling function is installed. That is, when the number of game executions reaches the ceiling number (here, 900), the specific game state (general electric support) is generated without generating the special game state.

FIG. 51 shows a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the gaming machine of this modified example. The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, a second special game state ST3, and a first specific game state ST4. Also, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of deriving a special result is always constant.

When a big win is achieved in the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the first special game state ST2. Since the next game after the end of the first special game state ST2 will be in the state of general electric support and time saving, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST4.
When shifting to the first specific game state ST4, since the second start memory is generated by winning the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by the general electric support, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. do.

In this first specific game state ST4, when a big hit is achieved, the game moves to the first special game state ST2. Also, in the first specific game state ST4, when a small hit is achieved, the game moves to the second special game state ST3. If the conditions for general electric support and short working hours are met, only the next one game will be general electric support and short working hours, so the result will be a small hit. Even if it is in the state, it shifts to a state without general electric support and time saving by the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, so in the second special game state ST3, it becomes a state without general electric support and time saving.

When the game ball has flowed into the specific area in the second special game state ST3 (V winning), the game moves to the first special game state ST2. Further, when the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special game state ST3, if there is a second start memory, it will shift to the first specific game state ST4, if there is no second start memory, the normal game state ST1. transition to That is, when the game moves to the first specific game state ST4, the game state transitions between the first specific game state ST4 and the second special game state ST3 until the second starting memory disappears. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the winning balls obtained in the second special game state ST3. This state in which the number of held balls increases continues until a big hit occurs and the state shifts to the first special game state ST2, or until the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 without the second start memory after the second special game state ST3 ends. do.
In this way, although the game machine is provided with the general electric support and the time saving, the general electric support and the time saving are always set in the second special game state ST3.

FIG. 52 shows an example of progress of the game after the occurrence of the big hit. The game after the occurrence of the big hit is the same as the example shown in FIG. It is assumed that the opening of is sufficient time to be performed multiple times. Then, if the game ball flows into the specific area in the second special game state, it will be in the first specific game state (t23).

FIG. 53 shows a block diagram of the game machine control system of this modified example.
The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 receives signals from the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball outlet switch 38e provided in the second special variable winning device 39. FIG. Further, the second output port 134 of the output section 130 outputs operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member in the second special variable winning device 39. FIG.

[Timer interrupt processing]
In this modified example, instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 54 is performed. In this timer interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not an abnormal ejection is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that, in the second special variable winning device 39, the number of game balls discharged from the second special variable winning device 39 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the second special variable winning device 39 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 39a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing. On the other hand, when abnormal ejection is not occurring (step X110; N), a special figure game process (step X112) for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game is performed.

[Special game processing]
In this modification, instead of the special game process shown in FIG. 13, the special game process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. In this special game process, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring detection of a game ball in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3). Also, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 56 is performed in the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). During the small hit here is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If the small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing. Moreover, when it is during a small hit (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step A42).

If the condition device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Afterwards, processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the existence of this specific area passing flag.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed in the small hit remaining ball processing (step A18) in the special game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. Also, if the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. Also, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small hits after step A863 is performed.

That is, after all the remaining balls in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are discharged, the process for ending the small hit is performed. However, in the case of a remaining ball error, which is a state in which discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the last game ball entered the second special variable prize winning device 39, the time required for discharge has passed sufficiently. As a result, the process is shifted to end the small hit. Of course, when there is a remaining ball error, the processing for ending the small hit may not be performed. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the processing for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has passed (step A863). When a gaming ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, it is detected by the specific area switch 38d and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a specific area passage based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. If there is passage through the specific area (step A863; Y), the process proceeds to step A870 to perform processing for generating a special game state. Moreover, when there is no specific area passage (step A863; N), it transfers to step A864, finishes a small hit game state, and performs the process for making a special figure variation display game executable.

In the processing for terminating the small winning game state after step A864 and making the special figure variation display game executable, 10 for the small winning end processing is set as the processing number (step A864), and the special figure game processing number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (step A865). Next, the small winning ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A866), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A867). Then, the big winning hole count area is cleared (step A868), the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small hit remaining ball processing is finished.

On the other hand, there is a specific area passing (step A863; Y), when performing the process of generating a special game state after step A870, load the command from the decoration special figure command area and prepare (step A870), production command Setting processing is performed (step A871). Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, the signal related to the start of the big win (V big win) is saved in the external information output data area (step A874), and the test signal related to the start of the big win (V big win) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the character is continuously operated) The device operation signal is turned on, and the special pattern 2 winning signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A875).

Then, the number of the jackpot is saved in the game state display number area (step A876), the round number upper limit table is set (step A877), and the round number upper limit value (this modification) corresponding to the round number upper limit information In case 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small win operation corresponds to the first round, 9 rounds are released in the special game state by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds. I'm trying

After that, set 3 for fanfare/interval processing as the processing number (step A881) and save in the special figure game processing number area (step A882). Furthermore, the V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A883), the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (step A884) is performed, and the processing proceeds to step A868.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of deriving a special result is always constant.

FIG. 58 shows an example of distribution ratios in this modified example. In contrast to the distribution rate of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the distribution rate of this modified example is as shown in FIG. 58(b). The only difference is that the game is in a state with general electricity support.
FIG. 59 shows a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this modified example. The transition of the game state in this modified example is the transition of the game state shown in FIG. The trigger for the end of the first specific game state ST4 is when the second start memory is lost due to continuous small hits, or when there is no second start memory and a deviation result is derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. ing. It should be noted that the result may be derived for the special figure 2 variation display game, and the possibility of ending the first specific game state ST4 may be given by derivation of the result in the special figure 2 variation display game.

By doing so, it is possible to provide a period in which the number of balls possessed by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small wins, similarly to the first embodiment, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since there is no change in the special figure probability, the game state in the second special game state in which the number of game balls increases can be set to a state other than the state of "high probability state and no time reduction".

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the order of various processes is different.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60(a), jackpot lottery processing (step S1), jackpot pattern lottery processing (step S2), time-saving pattern lottery processing (step S3), variation pattern lottery processing ( The processing was performed in the order of step S4) and counting of the number of normal probability fluctuations (step S5). Incidentally, the jackpot lottery processing (step S1) corresponds to the processing of steps A322 and A342 in FIG. 18, and the jackpot pattern lottery processing (step S2) corresponds to steps A432 to A434 in FIG. 22 and steps A472 to A474 in FIG. handle. Also, the time saving pattern lottery process (step S3) corresponds to steps A447 to A449 in FIG. 22 and steps A487 to A489 in FIG. 23, and the variation pattern lottery process corresponds to steps A326 and A346 in FIG. Further, the processing of steps A762, A764, and A765 in FIG. 27 corresponds to counting the number of normal probability fluctuations.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine of this modification, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the fluctuation pattern lottery process (step S4) is performed before the time saving pattern lottery process (step S3). When starting the general electric support from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that reaches the ceiling, the fluctuation pattern lottery process is later than the time reduction pattern lottery process (step S3) and the normal probability fluctuation count (step S4). If this happens, the player may be confused because the special figure variation display game is executed in the variation pattern during the general electricity support without the notification of suddenly instructing to hit to the right when reaching the ceiling. Therefore, by performing the fluctuation pattern lottery process (step S4) between the big hit pattern lottery process (step S2) and the time saving pattern lottery process (step S3) or the normal probability fluctuation count (step S5), the ceiling It is possible to prevent the special figure variation display game from being executed in the variation pattern during the general electric support without the notification of suddenly instructing to hit to the right at the time of arrival.

[Sixth modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example is capable of executing a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests reaching the ceiling.

FIG. 61 shows an example of the ceiling suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 61(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. A second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided in the lower right part of the display area. The second ornament game displayed in the second ornament game display section 82 has left, middle, and right areas in the same manner as the first ornament game displayed in the ornament special figure variation display game display section 81. After displaying the identification information in a variable manner, it stops and displays the results.

In addition, a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display unit 83 displays the information of the starting memory corresponding to the main special figure variation display game corresponding to the game state among the first starting memory and the second starting memory. It should be noted that the information about both starting memories may be displayed all the time. Since the game is in the normal game state here, the information of the first start memory is displayed. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the memory display unit 83 corresponds to the first starting memory one-to-one, and is displayed in order of memory, and here it is shown that there are three first starting memories. showing. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the look-ahead such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the memory display section 83, there is provided a running memory display section 84 for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84, and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed, the variation pattern, etc. is suggested by its display mode.

A starting memory number display section 85 for displaying the number of starting memories is provided in the upper left part of the display area. The starting memory number display section 85 is provided with a first starting memory number display section 85a for displaying the number of the first starting memory and a second starting memory number display section 85b for displaying the number of the second starting memory. ing.
An effect mode display portion 644 for displaying the current effect mode is provided below the starting memory number display portion 85 .
Also, in the upper right part of the display area, there is provided a game number display section 645 for displaying the number of executed games counted for managing the reaching of the ceiling corresponding to the number of normal probability fluctuations. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the number of games to reach the ceiling is 900 games, and FIG. 61(a) shows that 800 games have been executed. Note that the game number display section 645 may display regardless of the number of executed games, or may display when the number of executed games is a predetermined number or more (for example, 800 games or more).

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the fluctuation time ends, the result mode is displayed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in FIG. 61(c). Then, the decoration special figure starting memory display of the memory display unit 83 decreases corresponding to the decrease of the starting memory number, and the display of the starting memory number display unit 85 is also updated. Also, the display of the number-of-games display section 645 is updated.

After that, as the game progresses, the number of executed games reaches 850 as shown in FIG. 61(d), and when the 851st game starts as shown in FIG. 61(e), it suggests reaching the ceiling. It is an omen period, and it shifts to the omen zone, which is a production mode that suggests reaching the ceiling. In this portent period, in addition to suggesting that the ceiling will soon be reached, it is also possible to suggest a set probability value as shown in FIG. 61(f).

In this way, by suggesting the probability set value in the sign period when the ceiling is near, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who continues the game until the sign period when the ceiling is near. In addition, since it is possible to suggest reaching the ceiling during the sign period, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game until reaching the ceiling, but if the sign period is long, the player becomes bored. There is a risk. However, by giving a privilege to the player during the sign period, the player can continue playing the game without getting bored even if the sign period is long. Moreover, even if the player does not reach the ceiling due to a big hit at a stage where the player is close to reaching the ceiling, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of not reaching the ceiling because the privilege is given during the premonitory period.

Although the premonitory period is assumed to be 50 games before reaching the ceiling, it is not limited to this. In addition, although the probability setting value is suggested as a privilege given to the player during the omen period, it is not limited to this, and may be the provision of prefetch information about the start memory, the execution of an effect that does not normally appear, etc. Also good. Also, although the number of games played is displayed numerically in the number-of-games display section 645, it does not display a clear numerical value. The proximity of arrival may be indicated.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the timing of performing the end processing of the general electric support.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
In the gaming machine of this modification, instead of the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 25, the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 62 is performed. In this special figure fluctuation process, the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A612) for managing the number of times the game is executed in the general electricity support state (time saving state) is not performed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Moreover, the process shown in FIG. 63 is performed in place of the latter half of the process during special figure display shown in FIG. In this process, a time reduction fluctuation count update process (step A612) for managing the number of times the game is executed in the general electricity support state (time reduction state) is performed. This time reduction fluctuation count update process is performed before the support operation setting process (step A742) for setting the start of the general electric support based on the per time reduction symbol in the special figure display process. That is, in the same interrupt process, the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process capable of ending the general electric support is performed first, and the support operation setting process capable of starting the general electric support is performed later. .

FIG. 64 shows an example of progress of a game on the gaming machine of this modified example. This example is similar to the progress of the game shown in FIG. In the gaming machine of this modification, the end timing of the general electric support is the end timing of the special figure fluctuation display game, that is, the end timing of the result stop display time. As a result, the general electric support started by the end of the first special game state ends at the end timing of the special figure variation display game started by the end of the first special game state (t13).

In addition, the general electric support by the big hit or the time saving pattern hit is started at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the time saving pattern hit (t15, t20, t22, t26), and the special figure fluctuation display game that is the time saving pattern hit. It ends at the end timing of the next special figure variation display game (t17, t22, t24). Here, when the time-saving design hit continues (t20 to t23), the end and start of the general electric support occur at the end timing of the special figure variation display game (t22). In this case, in the same interrupt processing, the time reduction fluctuation count update process (step A612) capable of ending the general electric support is performed first, and the support operation setting process (step A742) capable of starting the general electric support ) later. As a result, after the general electricity support ends, a new general electricity support is started. For this reason, in terms of processing, there will be no general electric support for a short period of time, but in practice the execution mode will be equivalent to continuous general electric support.

By doing the above, if the normal power support ends and starts at the same time, the normal power support will end first, and then the new normal power support will start. It is possible to reliably start the general electricity support without causing a situation in which a new general electricity support is started while the electricity support is being executed. In particular, if the setting is such that the general electricity support cannot be started with a new time saving pattern while the general electricity support continues, the end and start of the general electricity support will be at the same timing. If the end processing of the general electric support is performed after the start processing of the general electric support, the general electric support according to the time saving pattern cannot be started. However, as in the gaming machine of this modified example, by performing the end processing of the general electric support before the start processing of the general electric support, it is possible to reliably start the general electric support according to the time saving symbol.

As the game effects, the effects shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 and the effects shown in FIG. 43 can be executed. However, when the support state display unit 646 as shown in FIG. 43 is provided, when both the condition for ending the general electric support and the condition for starting the general electric support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game In the situation where there is no electric support (t22), the display mode of the support state display section 646 is not changed to the character display of "waiting for support" indicating that there is no electric support, and the character display is not performed. It is preferable to leave the character display and character display of "supporting!!" indicating that there is a certain state. That is, in the case where both the condition for ending the general electric support and the condition for starting the general electric support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game, in the situation where the general electric support is not available for a short period (t22), the second state standby Without executing an effect (for example, an effect of displaying characters and characters “waiting for support” in the support state display section 646), an effect during the second state (for example, “supporting!!” It is preferable to continue the effect of character display and character display. Since the period during which there is no general electric support is short, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand by not making the player aware that the general electric support has ended.

Also, during the period from t20 to t24 in FIG. 64, an external information signal (2 jackpot signals) capable of specifying that the general electric power is being supported is output. That is, in a situation where both the condition for ending the normal support and the condition for starting the normal support are satisfied in one special figure fluctuation display game, and there is no normal support for a short period (t22), the two jackpot signals are ON is continued without turning OFF. In addition, at the timing of this t22, the two jackpot signals may be turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms), or at the timing of this t22, a pulse signal (described later) may be output separately from the two jackpot signals. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside of the game machine that the new general electric support will start.

[jackpot signal]
The game control device 100 can output a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, and a jackpot 4 signal as external information signals relating to the special game state among the external information signals to be supplied to an external device such as a management device. It is possible.
Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100, in step A720 of the special figure displaying process (FIG. 26), as a signal corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability, The jackpot 2 signal and jackpot 3 signal are saved in the external information output data area. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with balls (the jackpot opening information is other than jackpot opening information 1 (all short open)), and when there is a jackpot with no balls (big jackpot open). When the information is big winning hole open information 1 (all short open), it is ON state if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is OFF state otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is in the ON state, and is OFF in the case of the big win with no paid out balls.

Further, in step A793 of the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 (FIG. 30), as a signal related to the start of the big win (first special game state), for example, an ON state big win 1 signal and an ON state big win 4 signal are externally transmitted. Save in the information output data area.
In addition, in step A918 of the jackpot end processing (FIG. 35), as signals relating to the jackpot end, for example, the OFF state jackpot 1 signal, the OFF state jackpot 3 signal, and the OFF state jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. do.

In addition, in step A814 of the small win fanfare mid-process transition setting process (FIG. 31), as a signal relating to the start of the small win (second special game state), for example, an ON-state big win 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area. .
In addition, in the small winning end processing (step A19), as a signal relating to the end of the small winning, for example, the OFF state big winning 1 signal is saved in the part information output data area.

In addition, step A69 of the normal probability fluctuation frequency update process (Fig. 32), step A822 of the support operation setting process (Fig. 34), and step A941 of the jackpot end setting process 2 (Fig. 36 (b)), the start of time saving As a signal related to, for example, an ON-state jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area.
In addition, in step A754 of the time reduction variation number update process (FIG. 28) and step A931 of the jackpot end setting process 1 (FIG. 36(a)), as a signal regarding the end of the time saving, for example, the OFF state jackpot 2 signal is externally Save in the information output data area.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 40, each period of t12-t15, t16-t20, t21-t22, and t23-t26 is in a state where there is no general electricity support, so the jackpot 2 signal is OFF during these periods is set to That is, at t12, t16, t21, and t23, the OFF state jackpot 2 signal is saved.
It should be noted that during these periods, even if the general electric support ends, if the game state remains the first specific game state ST4 (if the production mode remains the chance mode), or if the game state is the second Since this period corresponds to the transition to the special game state ST3 (the display of the effect mode display section 644 is maintained in the same display as the chance mode), the jackpot 2 signal continues to be ON during these periods. You can make it work. That is, even if the general electric support ends, if the game state remains the first specific game state ST4, or if the game state shifts to the second special game state ST3, the normal timing (universal electric support At the end of), instead of saving the signal related to the end of the time saving, at a timing different from the normal timing (for example, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the first special game state ST2, or when the second start memory is It is also possible to save the signal regarding the end of the time saving at the time of shifting to the normal game state ST1.

When the ON state jackpot 1 signal is saved, the ON state (output state) of the jackpot 1 signal continues until the OFF state jackpot 1 signal is saved, and when the OFF state jackpot 1 signal is saved. , the OFF state (non-output state) of the jackpot 1 signal continues until the jackpot 1 signal in the ON state is saved. The same applies to the big win 2 signal, the big win 3 signal, and the big win 4 signal.

Here, there is a case where the second state (state with general power support) is entered after passing through the first special game state, and a case where the second state (state with power support) is entered without passing through the first special game state. , the output external information signal may be changed.
Specifically, at the start of the general electric support based on the jackpot with support (step A941 of the jackpot end setting process 2 (FIG. 36(b))), the jackpot 2 signal is output as a signal related to the start of the time saving (ON Save the state jackpot 2 signals in the external information output data area), at the start of the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling (normal probability fluctuation number update process (step A69 in FIG. 32)) and per time saving pattern At the start of the general electric support based on (step A822 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 34)), for example, as shown in FIG. can be configured to In the example shown in FIG. 65(a), as the pulse signal, an ON pulse of 3 jackpot signals is output. The ON pulse of the 3 jackpot signals is, for example, in a state where the 3 jackpot signals in the OFF state are saved in the external information output data region, the 3 jackpot signals in the ON state are saved in the external information output data region, and are generated for a predetermined short time. After (here, 128 milliseconds) has elapsed, the 3 jackpot signals in the OFF state can be saved in the external information output data area (the 3 jackpot signals saved in the external information output data area are returned to the OFF state) to be output.

By configuring in this way, detailed information can be notified to the outside. That is, the external device, depending on whether or not the pulse signal (on pulse of the jackpot signal) is received together with the jackpot 2 signal, the second state (the state with the general electric support) to be started is the second state after the first special game state. It is possible to discriminate between the second state and the second state without the first special game state.
In the case of this configuration, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal can be said to be an external information signal capable of specifying that the second information based on the arrival at the ceiling or the second information based on the time saving pattern hit starts.
In addition, this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a time-saving pattern hit in the result of the special figure variation display game. It can be said that it is an identifiable extrinsic information signal that the 2 information starts.
In addition, this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a ceiling function. It can be said that it is an identifiable external information signal.

Furthermore, the pulse signal (ON pulse of the jackpot signal) output together with the jackpot 2 signal is differentiated between the second state based on reaching the ceiling and the second state based on the time-saving pattern. Also good.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), at the start of the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling (step A69 of the normal probability fluctuation number update process (FIG. 32)), regarding the start of the time saving As a signal, an ON pulse of 2 jackpot signals and 3 jackpot signals is output, and at the time of starting the general electric support based on the time saving pattern (step A822 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 34)), a signal related to the start of time saving Alternatively, the ON pulse of two jackpot signals and four jackpot signals may be output.

By configuring in this way, more detailed information can be notified to the outside. That is, the external device determines whether or not the pulse signal is received together with the jackpot 2 signal. It is possible to discriminate whether it is a second state that does not go through the game state, and further, the second state that starts depending on the type of the pulse signal (big win 3 signal or big win 4 signal) received together with the big win 2 signal. It is possible to determine whether the state (state with general electric support) is the second state based on reaching the ceiling or the second state based on the time saving pattern.

It should be noted that the type of the pulse signal to be output together with the two jackpot signals is not different between when the second state is reached based on reaching the ceiling and when the second state is reached based on the time-saving pattern. It is also possible to vary the number of times of outputting the pulse signal to be output together.
Specifically, for example, at the start of the general electric support based on reaching the ceiling, 2 jackpot signals and 1 pulse signal (ON pulse of 3 jackpot signals) are output, and the general electric support based on the time saving pattern is output. It is also possible to configure so as to output two jackpot signals and two pulse signals (ON pulse of jackpot three signals) at the start.

Even when configured in this manner, more detailed information can be notified to the outside. That is, the external device determines whether or not the pulse signal is received together with the jackpot 2 signal. It is possible to determine whether it is a second state that does not go through the game state, and furthermore, the second state ( It is possible to determine whether the state with general electric support) is the second state based on reaching the ceiling or the second state based on the time saving pattern.

As described above, in each period of t12-t15, t16-t20, t21-t22, t23-t26 in the example shown in FIG. When the 2 jackpot signals continue to be ON, the 2 jackpot signals are turned OFF at the timings (t15, t20, t22, t26) when the general electric support resumes in order to notify the timing of the start (restart) of the general electric support to the outside. A pulse may be output, or at the timing (t15, t20, t22, t26) when the general electric support resumes, a pulse signal (ON pulse of 3 jackpot signals or an ON pulse of 4 jackpot signals) is output separately from the 2 jackpot signals. ON pulse) may be output.
The OFF pulse of the jackpot 2 signal is, for example, in a state where the jackpot 2 signal in the ON state is saved in the external information output data area, the jackpot 2 signal in the OFF state is saved in the external information output data area, and is generated for a predetermined short time. After (here, 128 ms) has passed, the ON-state jackpot 2 signal can be saved in the external information output data area (the jackpot 2 signal saved in the external information output data area is returned to the ON state) to be output.

From the above, in the gaming machine of each embodiment and each modified example, the game control means (game control device 100) sets the state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first state (state without general electric support), Control is performed in either a second state (state with general electric support) in which winning is easier than in the first state, or a state in which the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times). Based on this, an external information signal (for example, jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal (jackpot 3 signal ON pulse)) capable of starting the second state and specifying that the second state is occurring is transmitted to the gaming machine. (FIG. 65).

With this configuration, the second state occurs when the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, so that a new transition different from the conventional transition of the game state becomes possible, and the interest in the game is improved. be able to. Further, an external information signal is output when the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number of times, and the external information signal specifies that the second state is activated based on the number of game executions reaching the predetermined number of times. Since it is a possible signal, it is possible to accurately notify the game state to the outside of the game machine.

Furthermore, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state based on the fact that the result of the game is a specific result (per time saving symbol) different from the special result, and the second state is An external information signal that can identify the occurrence (for example, a jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal (ON pulse of jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal)) can be output to the outside of the gaming machine. (Fig. 65).

By constructing in this way, the second state occurs when the result of the game becomes a specific result, so that a new transition different from the transition of the conventional game state becomes possible, and the interest of the game is improved. can be done. Further, an external information signal is output when the result of the game becomes a specific result, and the external information signal is a signal that can specify that the second state is activated based on the specific result of the game. Therefore, the game state can be accurately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

[Temporary stop design effect]
In the gaming machine of each embodiment and each modified example, the effect control device 300 performs a temporary stop symbol effect, which is an effect using identification information during a temporary stop, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81 of the display device 41. It is executable. Specifically, as the temporary stop symbol effects, a first temporary stop symbol effect using part of the identification information during the temporary stop, a second temporary stop symbol effect using the entirety of the identification information during the temporary stop, is executable.
FIG. 66(a) shows an example of the first temporary stop symbol effect, and FIG. 66(b) shows an example of the second temporary stop symbol effect.

As shown in FIG. 66 , the identification information (decoration identification information 810 ) displayed in the decoration special figure variation display game display portion 81 includes a number portion 811 , a character portion 812 and a decoration portion 813 .
In addition, in the ornament identification information 810 shown in FIG. Also good. The decorative portion 813 is arranged behind the character portion 812 so as to overlap the number portion 811 and the character portion 812, but is arranged so as not to overlap at least one of the number portion 811 and the character portion 812. can be

The first temporary stop symbol effect is a effect in which the decoration part 813 periodically moves. In FIG. 66A, the decorative portion 813 is an effect image that imitates an aura, and is arranged behind the character portion 812 so as to overlap with the character portion 812 and is expanded and contracted. As a result, an effect is produced in which the aura emitted from the character appears to sway.
In FIG. 66A, the display size of the decorative portion 813 is set so that the most reduced decorative portion 813 is larger than the character portion 812 (the left end of FIG. 66A). (see ornament identification information 810), but not limited to this. For example, the display size of the decorative portion 813 may be set such that the most reduced decorative portion 813 is smaller than the character portion 812 and the most enlarged decorative portion 813 is larger than the character portion 812. It is possible. By setting in such a manner, it is possible to generate a period in which the entire decorative portion 813 is hidden by the character portion 812 (a period in which the decorative portion 813 is not visible), so that the aura emitted from the character appears and disappears. You can perform a production that makes it look like you are doing it.

In the first temporary stop pattern effect, the display mode (the display size in FIG. 66(a)) of the decoration part 813 changes periodically in order to make the decoration part 813 appear to be moving periodically. I can say there is.
Hereinafter, the operation cycle in the first temporary stop symbol effect, that is, the change cycle of the display mode in the first temporary stop symbol effect is referred to as "first cycle Y1". When the first temporary stop symbol effect is the effect shown in FIG. 66(a), the time required for the decorative portion 813 to expand or contract and return to its original size, specifically, for example, the upper part of FIG. 67(a) , the time required for changing (enlarging) the display size of the decorative portion 813 from the minimum to the maximum and changing (reducing) the display size from the maximum to the minimum within a predetermined display size range. becomes the first period Y1.

The second temporary stop symbol effect is a effect in which the entire ornament identification information 810 moves periodically. In FIG. 66(b), in the decoration identification information 810, the number portion 811, the character portion 812 and the decoration portion 813 are integrally swinging up and down.
In the second temporary stop design effect, the entire display mode of the decoration identification information 810 (display position in FIG. It can be said that it is a production that changes dramatically.
Hereinafter, the operation cycle in the second temporary stop symbol effect, that is, the change cycle of the display mode in the second temporary stop symbol effect is referred to as "second cycle Y2". When the second temporary stop symbol effect is the effect shown in FIG. 66(b), the time required for the decoration identification information 810 to move up and down and return to its original position, specifically, for example, FIG. 67(a) As shown in the lower part of , within a predetermined display position range, the display position of the ornament identification information 810 changes from the lower end to the upper end (moves upward) and from the upper end to the lower end (moves downward). is the second period Y2.

The effect control device 300 can change the first cycle Y1 during execution of the first temporary stop symbol effect. As a result, it becomes possible to execute various first temporary stop symbol effects, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Further, it is possible to change the second period Y2 during execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect. As a result, it becomes possible to execute various second temporary stop symbol effects, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.
Further, it is possible to simultaneously execute the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect. As a result, while the ornament identification information 810 is performing a predetermined operation (for example, swinging operation), part of the ornament identification information 810 can perform an operation different from the predetermined operation (for example, scaling operation). Since it becomes possible, interest in the game increases.
Also, when the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect are executed at the same time, it is possible to make the first period Y1 and the second period Y2 different. As a result, it is possible to execute various temporary stop symbol effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, since the ornament identification information 810 (ready-to-win pattern) forming the ready-to-win state is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute at least one of the first temporary-stop design effect and the second temporary-stop design effect during the ready-to-win state. It is possible.
When the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect are executed simultaneously during ready-to-win, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is possible to change the size relationship before developing into SP reach (or when not developing into SP reach) and after developing into SP reach. As a result, it is possible to execute a temporary stop symbol effect rich in variety during the occurrence of ready-to-win, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Specifically, in FIG. 67 (a) and (b), before developing into SP reach (or when not developing into SP reach), the second period Y2 was longer than the first period Y1, and developed into SP reach After that, the second period Y2 is changed during reach development so that the second period Y2 is shorter than the first period Y1. That is, the second period Y2 after reach development is shorter than the second period Y2 before reach development. As a result, the movement of the temporarily stopped decoration identification information 810 can be slowed down before the reach development, so that the player can see the decoration identification information 810 in a relaxed manner, and after the reach development, the movement of the temporarily stopped decoration identification information 810 can be slowed down. Since the movement can be made faster to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out, the interest in the game increases. In particular, after the reach development, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 may become smaller than before the reach development, as shown in FIGS. 67(c) and (d). By making the decoration identification information 810 stand out, even if the decoration identification information 810 becomes small, it is possible to make it easier for the player's attention to be directed to the decoration identification information 810 (ready-to-win pattern).

In FIG. 67, the first period Y1 before reach development and the first period Y1 after reach development are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. The second period Y2 is longer than the first period Y1 before the reach development, and the second period Y2 is shorter than the first period Y1 after the reach development, and the second period Y2 before the reach development is longer than the second period Y2 after the reach development. The first period Y1 before reach development and the first period Y1 after reach development may be different if at least one of the condition that the second period Y2 is short is satisfied.
If the condition that the second period Y2 after reach development is shorter than the second period Y2 before reach development is satisfied, the second period Y2 is longer than the first period Y1 before reach development, and the first period after reach development. Even if the condition that the second period Y2 is shorter than Y1 is not satisfied, it is possible to obtain the effect of showing the ready-to-win pattern loosely before the ready-to-win development and making the ready-to-win pattern stand out after the ready-to-win development.

Further, if the condition that the second period Y2 is longer than the first period Y1 before the reach development and the second period Y2 is shorter than the first period Y1 after the reach development is satisfied, then the second period Y2 before the reach development Even if the condition that the second period Y2 after reach development is short is not satisfied (for example, even if the second period Y2 before reach development and the second period Y2 after reach development are the same), the first period Y1 , it is possible to make the second cycle Y2 after reach development relatively shorter than the second cycle Y2 before reach development. can obtain the effect of making the reach pattern stand out.

It should be noted that the first temporary stop symbol effect can be executed even when a ready-to-win game is occurring. That is, in the first temporary stop symbol effect, when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in any one of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas, two of the left, middle, and right fluctuations are displayed. This can be executed in any of the cases where the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, and when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the three variable display areas of the left, middle, and right. be.
In addition, the second temporary stop symbol effect can be executed even when a ready-to-win game is occurring. That is, in the second temporary stop symbol effect, when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in any one of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas, any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuations are displayed. This can be executed in any of the cases where the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, and when the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the three variable display areas of the left, middle, and right. be.

66(b) and 67(a), (b), the display position of the decoration identification information 810 gradually changes between the upper end and the lower end within the predetermined display position range. is not limited to The second temporary stop symbol effect may be, for example, an effect in which the display position of the decoration identification information 810 changes suddenly between the upper end and the lower end within a predetermined display position range.
66(b) and 67(a), (b) alternately repeat the mode in which the ornament identification information 810 moves upward and the mode in which the ornament identification information 810 moves downward. , but not limited to. The second temporary stop symbol effect may be, for example, an effect that alternately repeats a mode in which the ornament identification information 810 moves leftward and a mode in which the ornament identification information 810 moves rightward. may alternately repeat a mode in which the is rotated to the left (clockwise) and a mode in which the ornament identification information 810 is rotated to the right (counterclockwise).

Further, the second temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to an effect in which the entire ornament identification information 810 swings (vertically moves, moves horizontally, rotates horizontally) at a predetermined cycle. That is, the second temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect in which the overall display position of the decoration identification information 810 changes periodically, and the overall display mode of the decoration identification information 810 (display position, display size, shape, color , pattern, transparency, or a combination thereof) may be changed periodically.

66(a), 67(a), and 67(b), the display size of the decorative portion 813 gradually changes between the maximum and minimum within a predetermined display size range. Not limited. As shown in FIG. 68(a), for example, the first temporary stop symbol effect may be an effect in which the display size of the decorative portion 813 changes suddenly between the maximum and minimum within a predetermined display size range.
66(a) and 67(a) and (b) alternately repeat the mode in which the decorative portion 813 expands and the mode in which the decorative portion 813 contracts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first temporary stop symbol effect may be, for example, a effect in which the decorative portion 813 appears, expands, and disappears as shown in FIGS. 68(b) and (c), or the decorative portion 813 appears. It may be an effect that repeats the mode of shrinking and disappearing. In FIG. 68(c), the dashed line indicates that the decorative portion 813 has disappeared (non-display state). For example, by setting the display size of the decoration part 813 to "0", the decoration part 813 disappears.

Further, the first temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to an effect in which the decorative portion 813 expands and contracts at a predetermined cycle (including a mode of appearing, expanding, and disappearing, and a mode of appearing, shrinking, and disappearing). That is, the first temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to the effect that the display size of the decoration portion 813 changes periodically, and the display mode of the decoration portion 813 (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, transparency, etc. Or a combination of these) may be an effect that changes periodically.

69 and 70 show another example of the first temporary stop symbol effect.
In FIG. 69A, the decorative portion 813 is an image including a frame image surrounding the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 and a background image inside the frame image. ) is in periodic motion. Specifically, the color, pattern, and the like of the display mode of a portion (background image) of the decorative portion 813 change periodically.
In FIG. 69B, the decorative portion 813 is an image including a frame image surrounding the character portion 812 and an effect image 813a imitating luster moving along the frame image. (effect image 813a) is moving periodically. Specifically, the effect image 813a repeats a mode in which it appears in the lower part of the frame image, splits into two, and moves to the upper part of the frame image. That is, the display position, shape, and the like of the display mode of a part of the decorative portion 813 (effect image 813a) change periodically. According to this first temporary stop design effect, the effect image 813a makes it possible to make the frame look glossy. , it is possible to make the light that illuminates the frame appear to move periodically.

The decoration portion 813 is not limited to an image arranged behind the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 . The decoration portion 813 may be an image arranged in front of the number portion 811 and the character portion 812. For example, as shown in FIG. The image may be arranged behind the character portion 811 and in front of the character portion 812 .
In FIG. 69(c), the decorative portion 813 is an effect image imitating lightning, and the entire decorative portion 813 moves periodically. Specifically, the decorative portion 813 (effect image imitating lightning) appears, fades and disappears repeatedly. In other words, the color, transparency, etc. of the overall display mode of the decorative portion 813 change periodically. For example, by setting the transparency of the decoration part 813 to "100", the decoration part 813 disappears.

The decoration identification information 810 may include a plurality of decoration parts 813, as shown in FIG. 70(a), for example. In FIG. 70(a), the decoration identification information 810 includes, as the decoration part 813, a first decoration part 813b that is an image imitating a flag and a second decoration part 813c that is an image imitating a scarf. , a portion of the first decorative portion 813b and a portion of the second decorative portion 813c respectively move periodically. That is, the display mode (display size, shape, color, etc.) of part of the first decorative portion 813b and the display mode (display size, shape, color, etc.) of part of the second decorative portion 813c are periodic. is changing to This creates an effect that makes the flag and scarf worn by the character look like they are waving.

Since both the effect in which the first decorative portion 813b makes periodic movements and the effect in which the second decorative portion 813c makes periodic movements are effects using part of the decoration identification information 810, the first It is a temporary stop pattern production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70(b), both the operating cycle of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the operating cycle of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) are set to the first cycle Y1. . As a result, even if a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed simultaneously, it becomes clear that these effects are the first temporary stop symbol effects, so that the interest in the game increases.

In FIGS. 70A and 70B, the swinging direction of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the swinging direction of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) are set to the front-rear direction. That is, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) alternately repeat the forward and backward fluttering modes.
Furthermore, the timing at which the first decorative portion 813b (flag) swings back and forth is synchronized with the timing at which the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) swings back and forth. That is, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) are switched from the forward fluttering state to the backward fluttering state at the same timing, and the backward fluttering state is switched to the backward fluttering state. The first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) match in timing of switching to the fluttering mode.
This makes it possible to give a sense of unity to the movement of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) and the movement of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). It is possible to perform a certain production.

In addition, in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the operating range of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is set larger than the operating range of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). That is, the amount of movement per cycle of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is set larger than the amount of movement per cycle of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). Specifically, for example, the moving distance per cycle of the tip of the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is set longer than the moving distance per cycle of the tip of the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). ing. As a result, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is shown to be swinging more than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf).

The first decorative portion 813b (flag) has a larger area than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) for the part that moves periodically. Therefore, by making the first decorative portion 813b (flag) sway more than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf), the flag and scarf are realistically blown in the wind. It is possible to do
Also, the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is arranged behind the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). That is, since the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is arranged at a position farther from the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf), the first decorative portion 813b (flag) is enlarged. In the case of shaking, the visibility of the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 is less likely to be hindered than in the case of greatly shaking the second decorative portion 813c (scarf). Therefore, by swinging the first decorative portion 813b (flag) more than the second decorative portion 813c (scarf), it is possible to suppress obstruction of the visibility of the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 and perform dynamic effects. becomes possible.

In addition, a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects may be executed with a time lag. For example, one of a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects may be executed during a predetermined period, and the remaining first temporary stop symbol effects may be executed during a period after the predetermined period.
Further, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed simultaneously (or with a time difference), the direction of action (for example, swing direction) in each first temporary stop symbol effect may be the same or different. It's okay to be there. Also, the timing of the action (for example, the timing of swinging back and forth) in each first temporary stop symbol effect may be synchronized, or may not be synchronized. Further, the motion range in each first temporary stop symbol effect may be the same or may be different.
Also, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed simultaneously (or with a time difference), the types of motions in each first temporary stop symbol effect may be the same or different. For example, the first temporary stop symbol effect in which one decoration portion 813 swings and the first temporary stop symbol effect in which the other decoration portion 813 expands and contracts may be executed simultaneously (or with a time difference). good.

Further, among the operation cycles in the first temporary stop symbol effect, the operation cycle at the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect may be a different cycle from the normal cycle (first cycle Y1).
Specifically, when the first temporary stop symbol effect is the effect shown in FIG. 66(a), for example, as shown in FIG. During this period, the decoration portion 813 may be enlarged/reduced in a third period Y3 shorter than the first period Y1, and after the specific timing t52, the decoration portion 813 may be enlarged/reduced in the first period Y1. As a result, the first temporary stop symbol effect can be made conspicuous when the first temporary stop symbol effect is started, so that the player can be notified of the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect.

In the first temporary stop symbol effect that is performed during the occurrence of the ready-win, when the operation is performed in the third period Y3 at the start of the first temporary stop symbol effect, the specific timing t52 is the timing before the ready-win development. is preferred.
Also, the third period Y3 may be longer or shorter than the second period Y2 after reach development.
Further, when executing a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects with a time difference, after executing one of the plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects in the third period Y3, the remaining first temporary stop symbol effects are executed. It may be executed in the first cycle Y1. Specifically, for example, from the start timing t51 to the specific timing t52, the first temporary stop pattern effect (effect of flickering an effect image imitating lightning) shown in FIG. After the specific timing t52, the first temporary stop symbol effect (effect in which the effect image imitating an aura is enlarged or reduced) shown in FIG. 66(a) may be performed in the first period Y1.
Further, among the operation cycles in the second temporary stop symbol effect, the operation cycle at the start of the second temporary stop symbol effect may be a different cycle from the normal cycle (second cycle Y2).

The first temporary stop symbol effect is not limited to an effect in which a part or the whole of the decoration portion 813 moves periodically (an effect in which the display mode of the part or the whole of the decoration portion 813 changes periodically). A part or the whole of the part 812 may be rendered in a cyclical motion (a presentation in which the display mode of part or the whole of the character part 812 is periodically changed), or part or the whole of the number part 811 may be produced. may be an effect in which the is periodically moved (an effect in which the display mode of part or the whole of the number portion 811 is changed periodically). That is, since the first temporary stop symbol effect is a effect using a part of the decoration identification information 810, it may be a effect using the decoration part 813 as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 may be performed using a character portion 812 as shown in FIG. 71B, or an effect using a number portion 811 as shown in FIG.
In FIG. 71(a), part of the character portion 812 is periodically moving. Specifically, the character's mouth is opening and closing.
In FIG. 71(b), a number portion 811 is an image including a number image and an effect image 811a imitating gloss moving along the number image. The image 811a) is in periodic motion.

In addition, when a plurality of types of first temporary stop symbol effects are executed simultaneously (or with a time difference), all of the plurality of types are first temporary stop symbol effects using the decoration portion 813, as shown in FIG. 70(a), for example. It may be a pattern effect, all of the plurality of types may be a first temporary stop pattern effect using the number part 811, and all of the plurality of types may be a first temporary stop using the character part 812. It may be a design presentation.
Alternatively, at least two of the first temporary stop symbol effect using the number part 811, the first temporary stop symbol effect using the character part 812, and the first temporary stop symbol effect using the decoration part 813 are performed simultaneously (or with a time difference). ) can be executed. Specifically, for example, a first temporary stop pattern effect in which a portion of the character portion 812 (character's hair) cyclically moves, and a first temporary stop pattern effect in which the first decorative portion 813b (flag) cyclically moves. The temporary stop symbol effect and the first temporary stop symbol effect in which the second decorative portion 813c (scarf) periodically moves may be executed simultaneously (or with a time lag).

The character part 812 of the decoration identification information 810 may be in a non-display state at a predetermined timing (for example, when the reach is developed), as shown in FIGS. 71(c) and (d). Also, the decoration part 813 of the decoration identification information 810 may be in a non-display state at a predetermined timing (for example, when reach is developed). That is, in FIG. 67(d), in the decoration identification information 810 after reach development (after display size switching), the number portion 811, the character portion 812, and the decoration portion 813 are all in the display state. Not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 71D, the character portion 812 may be in a non-display state, the decoration portion 813 may be in a non-display state, or the character portion 812 and the decoration portion 813 may be in a non-display state. It may be in a display state.
In addition, in FIGS. 67(c) and 71(c), in the decoration identification information 810 before reach development (before display size switching), the number portion 811, the character portion 812, and the decoration portion 813 are all displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the character portion 812 and the decorative portion 813 may be in a non-display state.

When the character portion 812 is in the non-display state, the number portion 811 and the decoration portion 813 are integrally moved periodically in the second temporary stop symbol effect.
Further, when the decoration portion 813 is in the non-display state, the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 are united and cyclically move in the second temporary stop symbol effect.
Further, when the character portion 812 and the decoration portion 813 are in the non-display state, the number portion 811 periodically moves in the second temporary stop symbol effect. That is, when the character portion 812 and the decorative portion 813 are in the non-display state, the second temporary stop symbol effect is an effect in which the entire number portion 811 moves periodically, and the first temporary stop symbol effect is the number portion 811. A part of it will be a production that makes periodic movements.

In addition, in FIG. 67(d) and FIG. 71(d), the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before reach development (before display size switching) is higher than the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after reach development (after display size switching). Although the display size is smaller, it is not limited to this, and the display size of the ornament identification information 810 after reach development (after display size switching) may be larger. Both when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching is smaller and when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching is larger than when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large When the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large, the second period Y2 is longer than the first period Y1, and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is If the condition that the second cycle Y2 is shorter than the first cycle Y1 when the size is small) is satisfied, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 is slowed down so that the player can recognize the decoration. The information 810 can be displayed loosely, and when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 can be sped up to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out.

Also, the timing at which the display size of the decoration identification information 810 changes (switches) is not limited to the time of development to the SP reach, and can be changed as appropriate.
Also, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before reach development and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after reach development may be the same.
In addition, whether the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect or not, the condition is that the second period Y2 is shorter in the second period than in the first period (and /or condition that the second period Y2 is longer than the first period Y1 in the first period and the second period Y2 is shorter than the first period Y1 in the second period), the decoration identification information 810 The movement of the decoration identification information 810 can be slowed down so that the player can see the decoration identification information 810 loosely, and in the second period, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 can be speeded up to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out. . The first period here may be before reach development, may be after reach development, or may be any other period. Also, the second period may be before reach development, after reach development, or any other period as long as it is a period other than the first period.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can execute a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and the effect control means and a display means (display device 41) for displaying a game-related display, and the effect control means is a decoration game (decoration special figure fluctuation display game) that variably displays an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. can be displayed on the display means, and when executing the first effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) that perform periodic movements using the identification symbol, Before the transition from the first state (the state of executing the N reach effect) to the second state (the state of executing the SP reach effect), the movement period (the first period Y1) in the second effect is the first The movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the effect is lengthened, and after the transition from the first state to the second state, the movement in the first effect is longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. (second period Y2) can be shortened (see FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, before the transition to the second state (or when not transitioning to the second state) and after the transition to the second state, the first effect is performed. It is possible to change the size relationship between the movement cycle in the effect and the movement cycle in the second effect.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decoration game, but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variably displayed in the decoration game, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the first state is not limited to the state of executing the N reach effect, and the second state is not limited to the state of executing the SP reach effect. For example, the state before the reach state occurs may be the first state, and the state after the reach state may be the second state. Alternatively, the first state is a state in which the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped and displayed in A variable display areas among the three variable display areas on the left, middle, and right, and B (B≠A). A state in which the decoration identification information 810 is temporarily stopped in the variable display area may be set as the second state.
In addition, before transitioning to the second state, the movement period (second period Y2) in the first effect may be shorter than the movement period (first period Y1) in the second effect. The movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the effect and the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be the same.
Further, after the transition to the second state, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. The movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the effect and the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be the same.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game. (Production control device 300), and a display means (display device 41) that displays related to the game under the control of the production control means, and the production control means has an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. A decoration game (decorative special figure fluctuation display game) that variably displays can be displayed on the display means, and a first production (second temporary stop symbol effect) and a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the ready-to-win state , Before the ready-to-win effect develops, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect is longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. It is possible to make the movement period (second period Y2) in the first effect shorter than the movement period (first period Y1) in the second effect (see FIGS. 67(a) and (b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed during the ready-to-win effect, the first effect occurs before the ready-to-win effect develops (or when the ready-to-win effect does not develop) and after the ready-to-win effect develops. It is possible to make the magnitude relationship between the period of movement in the second effect and the period of movement in the second effect different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decoration game, but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variably displayed in the decoration game, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In particular, when a ready-to-win game is occurring, the player pays attention to the identification pattern (ready-to-win pattern) temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute various effects using what the player is paying attention to while the ready-to-win game is occurring, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Before the ready-to-win effect develops, the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be shorter than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1). The motion cycle (first cycle Y1) and the motion cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be the same.
Further, after the ready-to-win effect develops, the cycle of movement in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be longer than the cycle of movement in the second effect (first cycle Y1). The motion cycle (first cycle Y1) and the motion cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be the same.

Then, the first effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) is a effect in which the entire identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) moves periodically, and the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) is an effect of identifying A part of the design (decoration identification information 810) may be constructed so as to produce a periodic motion (see FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b)). That is, the first period Y1<the second period Y2 before the reach development, and the first period Y1>the second period Y2 after the reach development.
With this configuration, before the ready-to-win development develops, it is possible to slow down the movement of the entire identification pattern so that the player can see the ready-to-win pattern in a relaxed manner, and to speed up the movement of a part of the identification pattern. It is possible to enhance the decorativeness by making a part stand out, and after the development of reach, it is possible to make the reach pattern stand out by speeding up the movement of the whole identification pattern, and to make the movement of a part of the identification pattern Since it is possible to make other effects (for example, SP ready-to-win effects) stand out by slowing down and making the part inconspicuous, the amusement of the game can be enhanced. Furthermore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously, the identification pattern is a state in which the whole identification pattern moves periodically, and a part of the identification pattern moves periodically. Since it becomes possible to play the game, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The second effect may be a second temporary stop symbol effect, that is, an effect in which the entire identification symbol (decoration identification information 810) moves periodically.
Also, the first effect may be a first temporary stop symbol effect, that is, an effect in which a part of the identification symbol (decoration identification information 810) periodically moves.

The identification pattern (decorative identification information 810) includes a number portion 811, a character portion 812, and a decoration portion 813, and the second effect (first temporary stop pattern effect) includes the number portion 811 and the character portion 812. , and the decoration part 813 may be configured so that one or two of them perform periodic movements (FIGS. 66(a), 68(b), 69(a), (b) ), (c), FIG. 70(a), FIG. 71(a), (b)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variety of second effects, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Note that the decoration portion 813 is, for example, an image other than the number portion 811 and the character portion 812 among the images forming the identification pattern.

Also, after the ready-to-win effect develops, at least one of the character portion 812 and the decoration portion 813 may be configured to be in a non-display state (see FIG. 71(d)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make character images and decoration images (for example, effect images) displayed in the production (for example, SP ready-to-win production) to be executed after the ready-to-win development develops, so as to enhance the amusement of the game. can be done. On the other hand, after the reach development, it is possible to make the reach pattern stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification pattern. Inconvenience such as the design not being conspicuous can be avoided.
Note that the period in which at least one of the character portion 812 and the decoration portion 813 is in the non-display state is not limited to after the ready-to-win effect develops.

Also, the display size of the identification pattern (ready-to-win pattern) forming the ready-to-win state may be configured to be smaller after the ready-to-win effect development than before the development (FIGS. 67(c), (d), See FIGS. 71(c) and (d)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to secure a sufficient area within the display area of the display device 41 as an effect display unit that displays the effect (for example, SP reach effect) to be executed after the reach development, so that the game can increase the interest of On the other hand, after the ready-to-win development develops, it is possible to make the ready-to-win symbols stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification pattern, so that the display size of the ready-to-win symbols becomes smaller, which may cause inconvenience (inconvenience such as inconspicuous ready-to-win symbols). can be avoided.
The display size of the identification pattern (ready-to-win pattern) forming the ready-to-win state may be larger after the ready-to-win effect than before the ready-to-win effect is developed, or may be the same before and after the ready-to-win effect is developed.

Also, the period of movement in the first effect (second period Y2) may be configured to be shorter after development of the ready-to-win effect than before development (see FIGS. 67(a) and (b)). .
By constructing in this way, the movements of the whole identifying patterns are slowed down before the ready-to-win development develops, and the ready-to-win patterns can be shown to the player in a relaxed manner, simply by changing (switching) the period of movement in the first performance at the time of developing the ready-to-win. is possible, and after the ready-to-win development develops, it becomes possible to make the ready-to-win patterns stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification pattern.
It should be noted that the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be longer after the ready-to-win effect than before the ready-to-win effect is developed, or may be the same before and after the ready-to-win effect is developed.

In addition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) provides a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect ) and a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) in which the second part (for example, the second decoration part 813c) of the identification pattern periodically moves, and the movement of the first part is the same as the movement period of the second part (first period Y1), and the amount of movement of the first part per period is different from the amount of movement per period of the second part. (See FIGS. 70(a) and (b)).
By configuring in this way, using one identification pattern, two types of effects, a second effect in which the first part makes a periodic movement and a second effect in which the second part makes a periodic movement, are produced. Since the second effect can be executed simultaneously, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the movement cycle is the same in the first part and the second part, and the amount of movement (movement amount) per cycle is different in the first part and the second part, it is possible to perform realistic effects. It becomes possible, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Note that the period of motion of the first portion may be different from the period of motion of the second portion.
Further, the amount of movement per cycle may be larger in the first portion or may be larger in the second portion. Also, the amount of movement per cycle of the first portion may be the same as the amount of movement per cycle of the second portion.
In addition, a second effect in which the first part of the identification pattern is cyclically moved, a second effect in which the second part of the identification pattern is cyclically moved, and a third part of the identification pattern is cyclically moved You may perform simultaneously with the 2nd production|presentation which moves. That is, not only two types of second effects are executed simultaneously, but also three or more types of second effects may be executed simultaneously.

In addition, the second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) may be configured such that the motion cycle is switched at a specific timing t52 before the ready-to-win effect develops (see FIG. 70(c)).
By configuring in this way, the cycle of movement is switched from the third cycle Y3 to the first cycle Y1 at the specific timing t52 before the ready-to-win effect develops, so that the second effect can be made conspicuous at the start of the second effect. It becomes possible. That is, since it is possible to notify the player of the start of the second effect, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The cycle (third cycle Y3) before switching at the specific timing t52 may be shorter or longer than the cycle after switching (first cycle Y1).
Also, the first effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) may be configured such that the motion cycle is switched from the fourth cycle Y4 to the second cycle Y2 at a specific timing t52 before the ready-to-win effect develops. The cycle (fourth cycle Y4) before switching at the specific timing t52 may be shorter or longer than the cycle after switching (second cycle Y2).
Further, the specific timing t52 is not limited before the ready-to-win effect develops.
Also, in the case where the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, in the second effect, the movement cycle is switched from the third cycle Y3 to the first cycle Y1, and in the first effect, the movement cycle is changed. When switching from the fourth cycle Y4 to the second cycle Y2, the timing at which the motion cycle switches may be the same or different between the first effect and the second effect.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game. (Production control device 300), and a display means (display device 41) that displays related to the game under the control of the production control means, and the production control means has an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. A decoration game (decorative special figure fluctuation display game) that variably displays can be displayed on the display means. 2 temporary stop symbol effect) and a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using an identification symbol (reach symbol) forming a ready-to-win state. In the case, before the ready-to-win effect develops, the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) is longer than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1), and the ready-to-win effect is achieved. After the development, it is possible to make the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) shorter than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1) (Fig. 67 (a ), see (b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed during the ready-to-win effect, the first effect occurs before the ready-to-win effect develops (or when the ready-to-win effect does not develop) and after the ready-to-win effect develops. It is possible to make the magnitude relationship between the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect and the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect different.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decoration game, but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variably displayed in the decoration game, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In particular, when a ready-to-win game is occurring, the player pays attention to the identification pattern (ready-to-win pattern) temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute various effects using what the player is paying attention to while the ready-to-win game is occurring, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Before the ready-to-win effect develops, the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be shorter than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1), The change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1) and the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.
Further, after the ready-to-win effect develops, the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be longer than the change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1), The change cycle of the display mode in the second effect (first cycle Y1) and the change cycle of the display mode in the first effect (second cycle Y2) may be the same.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game. (Production control device 300), and a display means (display device 41) that displays related to the game under the control of the production control means, and the production control means has an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. A decoration game (decorative special figure fluctuation display game) that variably displays can be displayed on the display means, and a first production (second temporary stop symbol effect) and a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously performed using a predetermined identification symbol (for example, decoration identification information 810 during temporary stop). When the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched during the execution of these effects (Figs. 67(c), (d), Figs. 71(c), (d)), the predetermined Before the display size of the identification pattern is switched, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect is longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect, and the predetermined identification pattern is displayed. After the size is switched, it is possible to make the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect shorter than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect (Fig. 67(a), (b)).

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using a predetermined identification pattern, before the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched and after the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched. It is possible to change the size relationship between the period of movement in the first effect and the period of movement in the second effect by .
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decoration game, but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variably displayed in the decoration game, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Before the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched, the movement period (second period Y2) in the first effect may be shorter than the movement period (first period Y1) in the second effect. , the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect and the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be the same.
Further, after the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched, the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be longer than the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect. However, the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the second effect and the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the first effect may be the same.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game. (Production control device 300), and a display means (display device 41) that displays related to the game under the control of the production control means, and the production control means has an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. A decoration game (decorative special figure fluctuation display game) that variably displays can be displayed on the display means, and a first production (second temporary stop symbol effect) and a second effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed, and when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the identification symbol (reach symbol) forming the ready-to-win state , Before the ready-to-win effect develops, the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect is made smaller than the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect, and after the ready-to-win effect develops, per unit time in the second effect. It is possible to make the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect larger than the amount of movement in (see FIGS. 67(a) and (b)).

Specifically, in the case of an effect (for example, FIG. 66A) in which the decoration part 813 expands and contracts as a whole, the movement amount (movement amount) per unit time in the effect is, for example, a predetermined point in the decoration part 813. It is the movement distance per cycle of (a point located away from the center of the decorative portion 813).
In addition, in the case of an effect in which the entire ornament identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction (for example, FIG. 66(b)), the amount of movement (movement amount) per unit time in the effect is, for example, one part of the ornament identification information 810. It is the moving distance per cycle.

That is, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed during the ready-to-win effect, the first effect occurs before the ready-to-win effect develops (or when the ready-to-win effect does not develop) and after the ready-to-win effect develops. It is possible to change the magnitude relationship between the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect and the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect.
Therefore, it is possible not only to display the decoration game, but also to execute various effects using the identification symbols that are variably displayed in the decoration game, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. In particular, when a ready-to-win game is occurring, the player pays attention to the identification pattern (ready-to-win pattern) temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute various effects using what the player is paying attention to while the ready-to-win game is occurring, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Before the ready-to-win effect develops, the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be larger than the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect, or the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect. and the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be the same.
Further, after the ready-to-win effect develops, the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be smaller than the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect, or the amount of movement per unit time in the second effect. and the amount of movement per unit time in the first effect may be the same.

Before the ready-to-win effect develops (or before the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched), the second cycle Y2 may be made infinite. That is, before the reach effect develops (or before the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched), the operation amount (movement amount) per unit time in the second temporary stop pattern effect is set to "0", and the identification pattern is displayed. The second temporary stop symbol effect, which is an effect in which the whole is cyclically moved, may not be executed (it may appear that the second temporary stop symbol effect is not executed).
Also, after the ready-to-win effect develops (or after the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched), the first cycle Y1 may be made infinite. That is, after the ready-to-win production develops (or after the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched), the operation amount (movement amount) per unit time in the first temporary stop pattern production is set to "0", and the identification pattern may not execute the first temporary stop symbol effect, which is an effect in which a part of .

In addition, the first effect is a effect (first temporary stop symbol effect) in which a part of the identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) periodically moves, and the second effect is the identification pattern (decoration identification information 810). may be configured such that the entirety of is an effect (second temporary stop symbol effect) in which a periodic movement is performed.
Specifically, when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed using the identification pattern that forms the ready-to-win state, before the ready-to-win effect develops (or before the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched) , the movement cycle (first cycle Y1) in the first effect is made longer than the movement cycle (second cycle Y2) in the second effect, and after the ready-to-win effect develops (or the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched). ) may be configured such that the movement period (first period Y1) in the first effect is shorter than the movement period (second period Y2) in the second effect. That is, before reach development (or before display size switching), the first period Y1>second period Y2, and after reach development (or after display size switching), the first period Y1<second period Y2.

By configuring in this way, before the reach development, it is possible to make the reach pattern stand out by speeding up the movement of the entire identification pattern, and slow down the movement of a part of the identification pattern to make the part visible. By not standing up, it becomes possible to make other performances (for example, N-reach performance) stand out, and after the development of ready-to-win, it becomes possible to slow down the movement of the whole identification pattern and to show the player the ready-to-reach pattern in a relaxed manner. Also, by speeding up the movement of a part of the identification pattern to make the part stand out, it is possible to enhance the decorativeness, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

If the first cycle Y1>second cycle Y2 before reach development (or before display size switching) and the first cycle Y1<second cycle Y2 after reach development (or after display size switching), reach performance develops. (or before the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched), the second period Y2 is set to "0", and the second temporary stop design effect, which is the effect in which the entire identification pattern moves cyclically, is executed. It may be set so that it does not (shows that the second temporary stop symbol effect is not executed).
In addition, before reach development (or before display size switching), the first cycle Y1 > second cycle Y2, and after reach development (or after display size switching), when the first cycle Y1 < second cycle Y2, reach production develops (or after the display size of the predetermined identification pattern is switched), the first period Y1 is set to "0", and a part of the identification pattern periodically moves. The symbol effect may not be executed (it may appear as if the first temporary stop symbol effect is not being executed).

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and Display means (display device 41) for displaying, and the effect control means displays a decoration game (decorative special figure variation display game) that variably displays the identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. can be displayed, the display size of the identification pattern can be changed (see FIGS. 67(c), (d), and FIGS. 71(c), (d)), and periodic movement can be performed using the identification pattern (temporary stop symbol effect) can be executed (see FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).
Therefore, not only the decoration game is displayed, but also the display size of the identification symbols variably displayed in the decoration game can be changed, and the identification symbols variably displayed in the decoration game periodically move. Since it is executable, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, in the case of executing an effect (FIG. 66(b)) in which the decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the decoration identification information The upward movement distance of 810 is n times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 (n=0.5 in FIG. 72(a)), and the downward movement distance of the decoration identification information 810 is also It is n times the vertical length of the ornament identification information 810 . That is, the motion amount (absolute motion amount) per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is 2n times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 .

In FIG. 72(a), the decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction, and the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is reduced (the length in the vertical direction is shortened) due to the development of the SP reach. Before reach development (before display size switching), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the ornament identification information 810 is 2n times the vertical length of the ornament identification information 810 before the display size switching. After the reach is developed (after the display size is switched), the absolute amount of motion per cycle of the ornament identification information 810 is 2n times the vertical length of the ornament identification information 810 after the display size is switched. there is
That is, in FIG. 72(a), the absolute amount of motion per cycle of the decoration identification information 810 is proportional to the display size of the decoration identification information 810 (vertical length in FIG. 72(a)). ing. Therefore, the absolute amount of movement of the decoration identification information 810 (absolute amount of movement per cycle visually recognized by the player) differs before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. The amount of movement relative to the display size of the identification information 810 (relative amount of movement per cycle viewed by the player) is the same before and after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched. Hereinafter, the amount of movement relative to the display size may simply be referred to as the "relative amount of movement".

It is also possible to change the relative amount of movement of the decoration identification information 810 before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched.
Specifically, for example, when the decoration identification information 810 swings in the vertical direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the development to the SP reach during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect. If the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is reduced (the length in the vertical direction is shortened), for example, as shown in FIGS. The absolute amount of motion per cycle of the ornament identification information 810 is set to 2n times the vertical length of the ornament identification information 810 before the display size switching, and after the reach development (after the display size switching), the ornament identification information It is possible to set the absolute amount of motion per cycle of the display 810 to 2m times (m≠n) the vertical length of the ornament identification information 810 after the display size is switched.

In FIG. 72(b), n=0.5 and m=1.0, and in FIG. 72(c), n=0.5 and m=2.0. That is, m>n in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c).
For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the relative amount of movement of the ornament identification information 810 changes before the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched (when the display size is large) and after the display size is switched (display size ) are the same, that is, when m=n, the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is reduced, so that the absolute amount of movement of the ornament identification information 810 is reduced. The smaller the absolute amount of movement, the more difficult it becomes to recognize whether or not the ornament identification information 810 is temporarily stopped (swayed), so the player is more likely to misunderstand the game situation. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c), the relative motion amount of the ornament identification information 810 is greater than before the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched (when the display size is large). is larger after the display size is switched (when the display size is small), that is, when m>n, even if the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is reduced, the absolute amount of movement is reduced. No (or the reduction in the absolute amount of movement is suppressed compared to the case of m=n). Therefore, since it is possible to suppress misrecognition of the player, the interest in the game increases. In this way, when the display size of the temporarily stopped decoration identification information 810 is small, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 is increased (the movement appears to be increased), thereby making the decoration identification information 810 stand out. Therefore, even if the ornament identification information 810 is small, the attention of the player can be easily directed to the ornament identification information 810, and the interest in the game increases.

That is, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller (smaller than the normal size) than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large (normal size) By increasing the relative movement amount of the ornament identification information 810 when the ornament identification information 810 is of a specific size, it is possible to suppress misrecognition of the player, and even if the ornament identification information 810 is small, the ornament identification information 810 can be made to stand out.

72(a) to (c), the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching is 2.0 times the vertical length of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching. but not limited to. That is, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching should be larger than the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching.
Also, the display size of the decoration identification information 810 before the display size switching may be smaller than the display size of the decoration identification information 810 after the display size switching. In this case also, the relative amount of operation of the ornament identification information 810 when the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is small is greater than the relative amount of operation of the ornament identification information 810 when the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is large. If the condition that the number is larger is satisfied, it is possible to suppress misrecognition of the player and to make the decoration identification information 810 stand out even if the decoration identification information 810 is small.

Also, in FIG. 72(b), the absolute movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, but it is not limited to this. That is, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small is larger than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. As long as the condition that the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large is satisfied, the absolute amount of movement of the decoration identification information 810 may be the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. may be larger before the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched, or after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched.

Also, in FIG. 72(c), the movement range of the decoration identification information 810 (the movement range visually recognized by the player) is the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched. not. That is, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is small is larger than the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large. As long as the condition of being large is satisfied, the operation range (display position range) of the decoration identification information 810 may be the same before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, or the display size of the decoration identification information 810 may be the same. It may be larger before the display size is switched, or may be larger after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched.

Further, among the effect modes of the second temporary stop pattern effect, the effect mode in which the second cycle Y2 is different before and after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched, and the effect mode before the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched. It is also possible to execute in combination with an effect mode in which the relative amount of motion is changed later.
Specifically, for example, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 becomes smaller (the length in the vertical direction becomes shorter) due to the development of the SP reach during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect, the second temporary stop As a symbol effect, the second cycle Y2 is shorter after the reach development than before the reach development (for example, FIGS. 67(a) and (b)), and the after reach development is relative to the reach development before the reach development. 72(b) or 72(c)) may be executed. As a result, after the reach development, the movement of the decoration identification information 810 during the temporary stop becomes faster and larger, so even if the decoration identification information 810 becomes smaller due to the development to the SP reach, the player's attention is kept on the decoration identification information 810 (reach). It is possible to make it easier to aim to the symbol), and the interest of the game increases.

Also, the swinging direction of the ornament identification information 810 is not limited to the vertical direction.
For example, even when executing an effect in which the ornament identification information 810 swings in the horizontal direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the relative movement amount of the ornament identification information 810 is changed before the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched. and later can be different.
Specifically, for example, in the case of executing an effect in which the ornament identification information 810 swings in the left-right direction as the second temporary stop symbol effect, development to SP reach occurs during the execution of the second temporary stop symbol effect. If the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is reduced (the length in the horizontal direction is shortened) by , 2n times the horizontal length of the ornament identification information 810 before display size switching, and after reach development (after display size switching), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the ornament identification information 810 is the display size It can be 2m times (m≠n) the length in the horizontal direction of the decoration identification information 810 after switching. Also in this case, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller than the relative amount of movement of the decoration identification information 810 when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large (for example, before reach development) When the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller (for example, after reach development) If the condition that the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 is larger, it is possible to suppress misrecognition of the player, and even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, the decoration identification information 810 can be conspicuous. It becomes possible to

In addition, for example, even when executing an effect in which the ornament identification information 810 rotates in the left-right direction (clockwise/counterclockwise direction) as the second temporary stop symbol effect, the relative movement amount of the ornament identification information 810 is , the display size of the decoration identification information 810 can be made different before and after switching. In this case also, the relative amount of operation of the ornament identification information 810 when the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is small is greater than the relative amount of operation of the ornament identification information 810 when the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is large. If the condition that the number is larger is satisfied, misrecognition by the player can be suppressed, and even if the ornament identification information 810 is small, the ornament identification information 810 can be made conspicuous.

Also, the first temporary stop symbol effect can be executed in an effect mode in which the relative amount of movement is different before and after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched.
Specifically, for example, in the case where the decoration unit 813 executes the overall expansion/contraction effect (FIG. 66(a)) as the first temporary stop symbol effect, during the execution of the first temporary stop symbol effect When the display size of the decoration identification information 810 changes due to the development of the SP reach, the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration part 813 (for example, a predetermined point in the decoration part 813 (a distance away from the center of the decoration part 813 The movement distance per cycle of the point at the position) is 2n times the display size (for example, the length in the horizontal direction) of the ornament identification information 810 before the reach development (before the display size is switched) before the display size is switched, After reach development (after display size switching), the display size (for example, length in the horizontal direction) of the decoration identification information 810 after display size switching can be increased by 2m (m≠n). In this case, when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is large (for example, before reach development), the decoration when the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is smaller than the relative amount of movement of the decoration unit 813 (for example, after reach development) If the condition that the relative motion amount of the unit 813 is larger is satisfied, it is possible to suppress misrecognition of the player, and even if the ornament identification information 810 is small, part of the ornament identification information 810 (here Then, the decorative portion 813) can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the relative movement amount of the decoration part 813 is not the movement amount based on the display size of the decoration identification information 810 (relative movement amount of the decoration part 813 with respect to the display size of the decoration identification information 810), but the decoration part It may be an operation amount based on the display size of the decoration part 813 (the operation amount of the decoration part 813 relative to the display size of the decoration part 813). That is, when the first temporary stop symbol effect is executed in an effect mode in which the relative amount of operation is different before and after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched, the relative amount of operation is the same as that of the ornament identification. It may be the movement amount of part of the decoration identification information 810 with respect to the display size of the entire information 810, or the movement amount of the part of the decoration identification information 810 with respect to the display size of the part.

Further, among the effect modes of the first temporary stop pattern effect, the effect mode in which the first period Y1 is different before and after the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched, and the effect mode before the display size of the ornament identification information 810 is switched. It is also possible to execute in combination with an effect mode in which the relative amount of motion is changed later.
Further, when the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect are executed simultaneously, at least one of the first temporary stop symbol effect and the second temporary stop symbol effect is displayed in the decoration identification information 810. It may be executed in an effect mode in which the relative amount of movement is different before and after the size is switched.

[Holding display effect]
In the game machine of each embodiment and each modified example, the effect control device 300 is the memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 of the display device 41, and the decoration special figure start memory display is a performance that periodically moves. A certain pending display effect can be executed.
Furthermore, the effect control device 300, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the display size of the decorative special figure starting memory display (execution suspension 84a) different. Specifically, the decoration special figure start memory display (waiting hold 83a) displayed in the memory display unit 83 is the running memory display at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display It shifts to the part 84 and becomes the execution suspension 84a, but when the decoration special figure start memory display arrives at the execution memory display part 84 (or during the transition to the execution memory display part 84) The decoration special figure It is possible to change (switch) the display size of the starting memory display.

When executing the effect that the decoration special figure start memory display swings in the vertical direction as the pending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the upward movement distance of the decoration special figure start memory display The vertical length of the decorative special figure start memory display is N times (N = 0.5 in Figure 73 (b)), and the downward movement distance of the decorative special figure start memory display is also the decoration special figure start It is N times the vertical length of the memory display. That is, the operation amount (absolute amount of operation) per cycle of the decoration special figure starting memory display is 2N times the vertical length of the decoration special figure starting memory display.

In FIG. 73(b), the decoration special figure start memory display is swinging in the vertical direction, and the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is increased by moving to the running memory display unit 84 (vertical length is long). The standby suspension 83a has an absolute motion amount per cycle that is 2N times the vertical length of the standby suspension 83a. The amount of movement is 2N times the vertical length of the execution suspension 84a.
That is, in FIG. 73 (b), the absolute amount of movement per cycle of the decoration special figure start memory display is the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 73 (b) ). Therefore, the absolute amount of operation of the decoration special figure start memory display (the absolute amount of operation per cycle that the player visually recognizes) is before and after the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is switched (during standby Although it is different between the suspension 83a and the execution suspension 84a), the relative amount of movement with respect to the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display (the relative amount of movement per cycle that the player visually recognizes) It is the same before and after the display size of the figure start memory display is switched (standby hold 83a and execution hold 84a).

The decoration special figure starting memory display (standby pending 83a) before the display size is switched and the decorative special figure starting memory display (executing suspension 84a) after the display size is switched are displayed at the same time (or displayed at the same time (often used). Specifically, when there is a starting memory in which the special figure variation display game has not been executed, the standby suspension 83a and the execution suspension 84a are displayed at the same time. Therefore, before and after the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is switched, the relative amount of operation of the decoration special figure start memory display (relative special figure start memory display with respect to the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display ) are made the same, it is possible to execute a suspension display effect with a sense of unity in a state in which the standby suspension 83a and the execution suspension 84a are displayed at the same time. increase.

On the other hand, the decoration identification information 810 before the display size is switched (for example, the decoration identification information 810 before the reach development) and the decoration identification information 810 after the display size is switched (for example, the decoration identification information 810 after the reach development) are different. Not displayed at the same time (or rarely displayed at the same time). Therefore, before and after the display size of the decoration identification information 810 is switched, the relative movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 (the movement amount of the decoration identification information 810 relative to the display size of the decoration identification information 810) is set to be the same. However, it is difficult to obtain the effect of being able to execute a temporary stop symbol effect with a sense of unity. Therefore, in the case of the decoration identification information 810, the relative motion amount may be the same before and after the display size is switched, or may be different. In particular, it is preferable to make them different because it is possible to obtain the effects described above (effects such as suppressing misrecognition by the player and making the ornament identification information 810 stand out even if it is small).

In addition, in the pending display effect, the swinging direction of the decoration special figure starting memory display is not limited to the vertical direction. That is, as a pending display effect, it is possible to execute the effect that the decorative special figure starting memory display swings in the left and right direction, and the decorative special figure starting memory display is in the left and right direction (clockwise / counterclockwise direction) It is also possible to execute a rotating effect.
In addition, the pending display effect is not limited to the effect that the decoration special figure start memory display swings (up and down movement, left and right movement, left and right rotation) at a predetermined cycle. That is, the pending display effect is not limited to the effect that the display position of the decorative special figure starting memory display changes periodically, and the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, Any effect may be used as long as the transparency, etc., or a combination thereof) changes periodically.

For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the pending display effect may be an effect in which the decoration special figure starting memory display rotates at a predetermined cycle. In FIG. 73 (c), the plate-shaped decoration special figure starting memory display rotates in one direction around the axis along the vertical direction (the plate-shaped decoration special figure starting memory display rotates in one direction ) is repeated. As a result, not only the front surface of the plate-shaped decoration special figure start memory display but also the back surface can be visually recognized.
In addition, the rotation axis when the decoration special figure starting memory display rotates is not limited to the axis along the vertical direction. The axis of rotation when the decorative special figure starting memory display rotates is, for example, an axis parallel to the display screen of the display device 41 (that is, not only the surface of the plate-like decorative special figure starting memory display by rotation but also the back side is visible ) or an axis orthogonal to the display screen of the display device 41 .

In the holding display effect in which the decoration special figure start memory display rotates, the rotation angle per cycle of the decoration special figure start memory display is 360 degrees regardless of the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display. That is, when the operation amount of the decorative special figure start memory display is defined as the rotation angle of the decoration special figure start memory display in the holding display effect in which the decoration special figure start memory display rotates, the display of the decoration special figure start memory display When the size is large (execution suspension 84a), and when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is small (waiting suspension 83a), the absolute operation amount of the decoration special figure start memory display is the same.

Also, in the holding display effect in which the decoration special figure start memory display rotates, the movement distance per cycle of the predetermined point P (point not on the rotation axis) in the decoration special figure start memory display is the decoration special figure start Proportional to the display size of the memory display. That is, when the operation amount of the decoration special figure start memory display is defined as the movement distance of the predetermined point P in the decoration special figure start memory display, the decoration special figure When the display size of the starting memory display is large (execution pending 84a) and when the display size of the decorative special figure starting memory display is small (waiting pending 83a), the relative amount of operation of the decorative special figure starting memory display are the same.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the shape of the suspension during standby 83a is a disk-like shape with a radius of r, the shape of the suspension during execution 84a is a disk-like shape with a radius of R, When the intersection of the straight line perpendicular to the rotation axis of the decorative special figure start memory display and passing through the center point of the decoration special figure start memory display and the circumference of the decoration special figure start memory display is set to a predetermined point P , the moving distance per cycle of the predetermined point P in the standby suspension 83a is 2πr, and the moving distance of the predetermined point P in the execution suspension 84a per cycle is 2πR. Since the display size (diameter) of the standby hold 83a is 2r and the display size (diameter) of the execution hold 84a is 2R, the relative motion amount of the standby hold 83a is π (=2πr/2r). Thus, the relative amount of motion of the execution suspension 84a is also π (=2πR/2R).

In the pending display effect, the direction of operation of the decorative special figure start memory display (swing direction, rotation direction, etc.) is when the display size of the decorative special figure start memory display is large (for example, execution suspension 84a) and the decorative special figure It is preferably the same as when the display size of the starting memory display is small (for example, during standby hold 83a). As a result, it is possible to execute a holding display effect with a more unified feeling. Of course, the direction of operation may not be the same when the display size of the decoration special figure starting memory display is large and when it is small.
In addition, in the pending display effect, the operation cycle of the decoration special figure starting memory display is that when the display size of the decoration special figure starting memory display is large (for example pending 84a during execution) and the display size of the decoration special figure starting memory display is small It is preferably the same as when (for example, waiting hold 83a). As a result, it is possible to execute a holding display effect with a more unified feeling. Of course, the operation cycle may not be the same when the display size of the decoration special figure starting memory display is large and when it is small.

Also, in the pending display effect, the timing of the operation of the decoration special figure start memory display is when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is large (for example, execution suspension 84a) and when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is It is preferable to be synchronized with when it is small (for example, waiting hold 83a). As a result, it is possible to execute a holding display effect with a more unified feeling.
Specifically, for example, in the case of executing the effect (for example, FIG. 73 (b)) in which the decoration special figure start memory display swings in the vertical direction as the pending display effect, from the mode of moving upward to the downward direction The timing to switch to the mode to move is decorated and the display size of the special figure start memory display is made to match when it is large and small, and the timing to switch from the mode to move downward to the mode to move upward is decorated Special figure start memory display By making the display size of the large and small display sizes match, it is possible to execute a holding display effect with a more unified feeling.
In addition, when executing the effect (for example, FIG. 73 (c)) in which the plate-shaped decoration special figure starting memory display rotates around the axis parallel to the display screen of the display device 41 as a pending display effect, the decoration special figure The timing at which only the front surface of the starting memory display is visible is matched between large and small display sizes, and the timing at which only the side surface is visible is matched between large and small display sizes, and only the back surface is visible. By matching the timing when the display size becomes large and when the display size becomes small, it is possible to execute the holding display effect with a more unified feeling.
Of course, when the display size of the decorative special figure starting memory display is large and when it is small, the timing of the operation may not be synchronized.

In addition, in FIGS. 73(a) and 73(b), the vertical length of the suspension during execution 84a is 2.0 times the vertical length of the suspension during standby 83a, but it is not limited to this. . That is, the display size of the execution suspension 84a should be larger than the display size of the standby suspension 83a.
Also, the display size of the execution suspension 84a may be smaller than the display size of the standby suspension 83a. Also in this case, the relative operation amount of the decoration special figure start memory display when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is large, and the decoration special figure start memory display when the display size of the decoration special figure start memory display is small If the condition that the relative amount of movement of and is the same is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suspension display effect with a sense of unity.

In addition, the pending display effect is not limited to the effect that the whole decorative special figure starting memory display moves cyclically, but may be an effect that part of the decorative special figure starting memory display moves periodically. . That is, the pending display effect, even if the entire display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, transparency, or a combination thereof) changes periodically Good, some display mode (display position, display size, shape, color, pattern, transparency, etc., or a combination thereof) of the decoration special figure starting memory display may be an effect that periodically changes.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can execute a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a start storage means ( A game control device 100), a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and a display means (display device 41) that displays the game under the control of the performance control means. The means can display, on the display means, an ornament game (decorative special figure variation display game) for variably displaying an identification symbol (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game, and the identification symbol during temporary stop display operates. An identification pattern effect (temporary stop pattern effect) can be executed, a start memory display (decorative special pattern start memory display) corresponding to the start memory can be displayed on the display means, and the start memory display operates. (Holding display effect) can be executed, and the operation amount (operation amount per unit time) of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect is when the display mode of the identification symbol is the first display mode (for example, before switching the display size ) and in the second display mode (for example, after the display size is switched), the operation amount (operation amount per unit time) of the starting memory display in the starting memory presentation is different from that in the display mode of the starting memory display in the third display mode. It is the same in the case of the display mode (for example, before display size switching) and in the case of the fourth display mode (for example, after display size switching) (see FIGS. 72 and 73).

That is, the operation amount of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect changes when the display mode of the identification symbol is switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, whereas the operation amount of the starting memory display in the starting memory effect does not change even if the display mode of the starting memory display is switched between the third display mode and the fourth display mode. Therefore, it is possible to not only display the decoration game and the starting memory display, but also perform the effect of operating the identification symbols variably displayed in the decoration game and the effect of operating the starting memory display, and furthermore, operate together. Even if it is an effect, since the presence or absence of a change in the amount of movement associated with the switching of the display mode differs between the identification pattern and the start memory display, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the movement amount of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be larger in the case of the first display mode, or may be larger in the case of the second display mode. Further, the movement amount of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect may be the same in the case of the first display mode and in the case of the second display mode. Further, the amount of movement in the first display mode and/or the amount of movement in the second display mode may be "0".
Further, the operation amount of the starting memory display in the starting memory presentation may be different between the third display mode and the fourth display mode. Further, the amount of movement in the case of the third display mode and/or the amount of movement in the case of the fourth display mode may be "0".

Also, the first display mode may be a display mode after switching the display size instead of the display mode before switching the display size.
Also, the second display mode may be the display mode before the display size switching instead of the display mode after the display size switching.
Also, the third display mode may be a display mode after switching the display size instead of the display mode before switching the display size.
Also, the fourth display mode may be the display mode before the display size switching instead of the display mode after the display size switching.

Then, the identification pattern of the first display mode (decoration identification information 810 before reach development) and the identification pattern of the second display mode (decoration identification information 810 after reach development) are different in display size, and the identification pattern effect ( The operation amount in the temporary stop symbol effect) may be configured to be an operation amount of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol. That is, the movement amount of the identification pattern relative to the display size of the identification pattern may be different between when the display mode of the identification pattern is the first display mode and when the display mode is the second display mode. (See FIGS. 72(b) and (c)).
By configuring in this way, when the display size of the identification pattern is switched, the amount of movement relative to the display size changes, so it is possible to execute the identification pattern presentation with the amount of movement that is not proportional to the display size. Become. Therefore, misrecognition of the player can be suppressed, and even if the decoration identification information 810 is small, the decoration identification information 810 can be made conspicuous, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The amount of movement of the identification pattern relative to the display size of the identification pattern may be larger in the case of the first display mode, or may be larger in the case of the second display mode. Further, the amount of movement of the identification pattern relative to the display size of the identification pattern may be the same in the case of the first display mode and in the case of the second display mode.
Also, the period during which the identification pattern in the first display mode is displayed is not limited to before the reach is developed.
Also, the period during which the identification pattern in the second display mode is displayed is not limited to after the reach is developed.
Also, the timing at which the display size of the identification pattern changes (switches) is not limited to when the reach develops.

As for the display size, the identification pattern in the first display mode may be larger, and the identification pattern in the second display mode may be larger.
Further, the identification pattern in the first display mode and the identification pattern in the second display mode may have the same display size. That is, the identification pattern of the first display mode and the identification pattern of the second display mode may have different display sizes, or may have different display modes other than the display size.
Further, the operation amount in the identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) is not limited to the operation amount of the identification symbol relative to the display size of the identification symbol. That is, the amount of movement in the identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) may be a relative amount of motion, or may be an absolute amount of motion.

In addition, the display size differs between the starting memory display of the third display mode (waiting pending 83a) and the starting memory display of the fourth display mode (executing pending 84a). The amount of movement may be configured to be the amount of movement of the starting memory display relative to the display size of the starting memory display. That is, the operation amount of the starting memory display relative to the display size of the starting memory display (for example, the amount of movement = the movement distance of a predetermined point P (point not on the rotation axis) in the starting memory display) is The third display mode and the fourth display mode may be configured to be the same (see FIGS. 73(b) and 73(c)).
With this configuration, even if the display size of the starting memory display is switched, the amount of movement relative to the display size does not change. It becomes possible. Therefore, in a state in which the starting memory display of the third display mode and the starting memory display of the fourth display mode are displayed at the same time, it is possible to execute the starting memory performance with a sense of unity, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.

The amount of movement of the starting memory display relative to the display size of the starting memory display may differ between the third display mode and the fourth display mode.
Further, the starting memory display in the third display mode is not limited to the standby hold 83a. That is, the starting memory display of the third display mode may be the execution suspension 84a.
Further, the starting memory display of the fourth display mode is not limited to the execution suspension 84a. That is, the starting memory display of the fourth display mode may be the standby hold 83a.
Also, the timing at which the display size of the starting memory display changes (switches) is not limited to the start of the game corresponding to the starting memory display.

Further, the display size of the starting memory display in the third display mode may be larger, and the starting memory display in the fourth display mode may be larger.
Further, the display size may be the same between the starting memory display in the third display mode and the starting memory display in the fourth display mode. That is, the display size of the starting memory display of the third display mode and the starting memory display of the fourth display mode may be different, or the display modes other than the display size may be different.
Further, the operation amount in the starting memory effect (holding display effect) is not limited to the operation amount of the starting memory display relative to the display size of the starting memory display. That is, the amount of movement in the starting memory effect (holding display effect) may be a relative amount of movement, or may be an absolute amount of movement.

In addition, the starting memory effect (holding display effect) is a effect in which the starting memory display (decorative special figure starting memory display) rotates, and the operation amount in the starting memory effect is the rotation angle of the starting memory display. You can That is, the rotation angle of the starting memory display may be configured to be the same when the display mode of the starting memory display is the third display mode and when the display mode is the fourth display mode (Fig. 73(c)). )reference).
With this configuration, even if the display size of the starting memory display is switched, the rotation angle of the starting memory display does not change, so that the starting memory effect can be executed at a constant angular velocity regardless of the display size. It becomes possible. Therefore, in a state in which the starting memory display of the third display mode and the starting memory display of the fourth display mode are displayed at the same time, it is possible to execute the starting memory performance with a sense of unity, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
Note that the rotation angle (rotation angle per unit time) of the starting memory display may be different between when the display mode of the starting memory display is the third display mode and when it is the fourth display mode.

In addition, the production control means (production control device 300) can notify information about the game corresponding to the starting memory display by displaying the starting memory display (decorative special figure starting memory display) in a specific display mode. The operation amount of the starting memory display in the starting memory effect (holding display effect) may be the same before and after the display mode of the starting memory display changes to a specific display mode.
Specifically, the effect control means changes the display mode (for example, color) of the starting memory display to a specific display mode, thereby changing the effect (pending change production) can be executed. Then, the operation amount of the starting memory display in the starting memory effect (holding display effect) (the above-mentioned movement amount) can be the same.
By configuring in this way, even if the holding change performance suggesting the result of the look-ahead is performed using the starting memory display during the execution of the starting memory performance, it is possible to continue the starting memory performance with a sense of unity. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the operation amount of the starting memory display in the starting memory effect (holding display effect) may be different before and after the display mode of the starting memory display changes to a specific display mode.

Further, the identification symbol effect (temporary stop symbol effect) is an effect in which a part or the whole of the identification symbol (decorative identification information 810) during the temporary stop display operates.
Therefore, it is possible to execute an identification symbol effect in which a part or the whole of the identification symbols being temporarily stopped is moved, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the starting memory effect (holding display effect) is a effect in which a part or the whole of the starting memory display (decoration special figure starting memory display) operates.
Therefore, since it is possible to execute the starting memory effect in which part or all of the starting memory display is operated, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, the display mode of the identification pattern (decorative identification information 810) may be configured to switch from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the development of the ready-to-win effect.
By configuring in this way, based on the development of the ready-to-win effect, the operation amount in the identification symbol effect changes, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Note that the trigger for switching from the first display mode to the second display mode is not limited to the development of the ready-to-win effect.
Also, the display mode of the identification pattern (decorative identification information 810) may be switched from the second display mode to the first display mode.

In addition, the display mode of the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) is configured to switch from the third display mode to the fourth display mode based on the start of the game corresponding to the start memory display. Also good.
By configuring in this way, even if the game corresponding to the starting memory display is started, the operation amount in the starting memory effect does not change, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The trigger for switching the display mode of the starting memory display from the third display mode to the fourth display mode is not limited to the start of the game corresponding to the starting memory display.
Further, the display mode of the starting memory display (decoration special figure starting memory display) may be switched from the fourth display mode to the third display mode.

Further, the identification pattern of the first display mode and the identification pattern of the second display mode are not displayed at the same time, and the starting memory display of the third display mode and the starting memory display of the fourth display mode are not displayed at the same time. They may be configured to be displayed at the same time.
By configuring in this way, the identification pattern of the first display mode and the identification pattern of the second display mode, which are not displayed at the same time, differ in operation amount (the operation amount in the identification pattern effect) and are displayed at the same time. It is possible to make the operation amount (the operation amount in the starting memory effect) the same between the third display mode starting memory display and the fourth display mode starting memory display. Therefore, in a state in which the starting memory display of the third display mode and the starting memory display of the fourth display mode are displayed at the same time, it is possible to execute the starting memory performance with a sense of unity, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be able to.
The identification pattern of the first display mode and the identification pattern of the second display mode may be displayed at the same time.
Further, the starting memory display in the third display mode and the starting memory display in the fourth display mode do not have to be displayed at the same time.

In addition, in a gaming machine that can execute a game (special figure fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generate an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game, the game can be executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory serving as an execution right, a performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling the performance of the game, and a display related to the game under the control of the performance control means. A display means (display device 41) is provided, and the effect control means can display on the display means a decoration game (decorative special figure variation display game) that variably displays an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. In addition, it is possible to execute an identification pattern effect (temporary stop pattern effect) in which the identification pattern during the temporary stop display operates periodically, and a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory is displayed. In addition to being able to display on the means, it is possible to execute a starting memory effect (holding display effect) in which the starting memory display operates periodically, and the operation cycle (for example, the second cycle Y2) of the identification symbol in the identification symbol effect The operation cycle of the starting memory display in the starting memory presentation is different between the first display mode and the second display mode (see FIGS. 67(a) and (b)). The display mode of the starting memory display may be the same in the case of the third display mode and in the case of the fourth display mode.

By configuring in this way, the operation cycle of the identification pattern in the identification pattern production changes when the display mode of the identification pattern is switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, whereas in the start memory presentation The operation cycle of the starting memory display does not change even if the display mode of the starting memory display is switched between the third display mode and the fourth display mode. Therefore, it is possible to not only display the decoration game and the starting memory display, but also perform the effects of periodically operating the identification symbols variably displayed in the decoration game and the periodically operating the starting memory display. Furthermore, even in the case of the effect of operating together, the identification pattern and the start memory display differ in the presence or absence of a change in the operation cycle associated with the switching of the display mode, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the operation cycle of the identification symbols in the identification symbol presentation may be longer in the case of the first display mode, and may be longer in the case of the second display mode. Further, the operation cycle of the identification symbols in the identification symbol presentation may be the same in the case of the first display mode and in the case of the second display mode. Further, the operating cycle in the first display mode and/or the operating cycle in the second display mode may be infinite. That is, the amount of movement in the first display mode and/or the amount of movement in the second display mode may be "0".
Further, the operation cycle of the starting memory display in the starting memory presentation may be different between the third display mode and the fourth display mode. Further, the operating cycle in the third display mode and/or the operating cycle in the fourth display mode may be infinite. That is, the amount of movement in the case of the third display mode and/or the amount of movement in the case of the fourth display mode may be "0".

In addition, in a gaming machine that can execute a game (special figure fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generate an advantageous state for the player according to the result of the game, the game can be executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory serving as an execution right, a performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling the performance of the game, and a display related to the game under the control of the performance control means. A display means (display device 41) is provided, and the effect control means can display on the display means a decoration game (decorative special figure variation display game) that variably displays an identification pattern (decoration identification information 810) corresponding to the game. In addition, it is possible to execute an identification pattern effect (temporary stop pattern effect) in which the display mode of the identification pattern during temporary stop display changes, and display a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory. In addition to being able to display on the means, it is possible to execute a starting memory effect (holding display effect) in which the display mode of the starting memory display changes, and the amount of change in the display mode of the identification pattern in the identification pattern effect (change amount per unit time ) differs between when the display size of the identification pattern is the first size (for example, before the display size is switched) and when it is the second size (for example, after the display size is switched), and the display of the starting memory display in the starting memory presentation The amount of change in the mode (amount of change per unit time) is determined when the display size of the starting memory display is the third size (for example, before the display size is switched) and when it is the fourth size (for example, after the display size is switched). are the same (see FIGS. 72 and 73).

That is, the amount of change in the display mode of the identification pattern in the identification pattern effect changes when the display size of the identification pattern is switched between the first size and the second size, whereas the display of the starting memory display in the starting memory effect The change amount of the mode does not change even if the display size of the starting memory display is switched between the third size and the fourth size. Therefore, it is possible to not only display the decoration game and the start memory display, but also perform an effect of changing the display mode of the identification symbols variably displayed in the decoration game and an effect of changing the display mode of the start memory display. Further, even if both display modes are changed, the presence or absence of a change in the amount of change in the display mode accompanying the switching of the display size differs between the identification pattern and the starting memory display, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced. .

The amount of change in the display mode of the identification pattern is not limited to the amount of change in the display position of the identification pattern (specifically, the moving distance of the decoration identification information 810 per unit time (see FIG. 72)).
In addition, the amount of change in the display mode of the starting memory display is the amount of change in the display position of the starting memory display (specifically, the movement distance per unit time of the decorative special figure starting memory display (see FIG. 73 (b)), Rotation angle per unit time of decoration special figure start memory display (see FIG. 73 (c)), movement distance per unit time of predetermined point P in decoration special figure start memory display (see figure 73 (c))) Not limited.
That is, the amount of change in the display mode may be the amount of change in display position, the amount of change in display size, the amount of change in shape, the amount of color change, the amount of pattern change, the amount of change in transparency, or the like. may be a combination of For example, if the amount of change in the display mode is the amount of color change, the change from white to gray per unit time to black is more likely to change from white to gray per unit time. The amount of change is larger than in the case of no change).

Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbols in the identification symbol presentation may be greater in the case of the first size, or may be greater in the case of the second size. Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the identification symbols in the identification symbol presentation may be the same for the first size and the second size. Also, the amount of change in the case of the first size and/or the amount of change in the case of the second size may be "0".
Further, the amount of change in the display mode of the starting memory display in the starting memory effect may be different between the third size and the fourth size. Also, the amount of change in the case of the third size and/or the amount of change in the case of the fourth size may be "0".

Also, the first size may be a display mode after switching the display size instead of a display mode before switching the display size.
Also, the second size may be the display mode before the display size switching instead of the display mode after the display size switching.
Also, the third size may be a display mode after switching the display size instead of a display mode before switching the display size.
Also, the fourth size may be the display mode before the display size switching instead of the display mode after the display size switching.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a start storage means (game control device) capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition 100), production control means (production control device 300) that controls the production of the game, and display means (display device 41) that displays the game under the control of the production control means. A first starting memory display (decorative special figure starting memory display) and a second starting memory display (number displayed in the starting memory number display unit 85) corresponding to the starting memory can be displayed on the display means, and the first starting A starting memory effect (holding display effect) in which the memory display operates can be executed, and the operation amount (operation amount per unit time) of the first starting memory display in the starting memory display is the display mode of the first starting memory display. is the same in the case of the first display mode (for example, before display size switching) and the case of the second display mode (for example, after display size switching) (see FIG. 73).
Therefore, not only can the first start memory display and the second start memory display be displayed, but also the effect of operating the first start memory display can be executed, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the operation amount of the starting memory display in the starting memory presentation may differ between the first display mode and the second display mode. Further, the amount of movement in the first display mode and/or the amount of movement in the second display mode may be "0".
Also, the first display mode may be a display mode after switching the display size instead of the display mode before switching the display size.
Also, the second display mode may be the display mode before the display size switching instead of the display mode after the display size switching.
Also, the first starting memory display is not limited to the decorative special figure starting memory display, and the second starting memory display is not limited to the number displayed on the starting memory number display section 85 (the number representing the starting memory number). For example, among the decoration special figure start memory display, the standby hold 83a may be the first start memory display, and the running hold 84a may be the second start memory display. The standby hold 83a may be the first start memory display of the first display mode, and the standby hold 83a in the state where the hold change effect is being executed may be the first start memory display of the second display mode. That is, the normal display mode (the display mode that does not suggest the result-related information) may be the first display mode, and the specific display mode (the display mode that can suggest the result-related information) may be the second display mode.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device (display means)
100 game control device (start storage means)
300 production control device (production control means)
810 Decoration identification information (identification design)
811 number portion 812 character portion 813 decoration portion

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Production control means for controlling game production;
A display means for displaying a game-related display under the control of the effect control means,
The production control means is
The display means can display a decorative game in which identification patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the game,
It is possible to execute an effect in which periodic movements are performed using the identification pattern in a first period before the predetermined effect and in a second period after the predetermined effect, among the periods during the decoration game. and
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display size of the identification pattern differs between the first period and the second period, and the cycle of the movement differs.

Images